AW46 - VS5 Service Manual - 5396255-100 - r4 - A4

GE Healthcare
AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6)
Service Manual
0459
5396255-100
Revision 4
Copyright© General Electric Company Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
GE Healthcare AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6)
Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100
This page is blank.
Page no. 2 cover_AW.fm

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Legal Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1. Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2. Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. Country of Manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4. Important Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5. Damage in Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6. Omissions and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7. Electrical Contractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7-1 Certified Electrical Contractor Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Notes and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
How To Use the AW Service Docs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1. Service Docs Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2. On–Line Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2-1 Access to Service Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2-2 Opening Service Documentation in New Browser Window or Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2-3 Access to the Operator’s Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2-4 Configure Acrobat Reader in Firefox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3. Key Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Publication Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1-1 Contents Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2. Conventions used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3. Useful Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Product Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1. Feature Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2. Product Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3. Application Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4. Software Release Version Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Chapter 1: Basic Tools and Procedures

1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2. Common Support Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2-1 Basic Linux Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2-2 Restart Advantage Workstation from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2-3 Shutdown Advantage Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
smTOC.fm Page no. 3

Table of Contents
2-4 Advantage Workstation and Site Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

2-5 Adobe Acrobat Reader Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2-6 Advantage Workstation Database Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2-7 Using the SMPTE Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2-8 How to find the Manufacturing date of a Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting
1. Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2. Troubleshooting guide: HP Z800, XW8600 and XW8400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3. Troubleshooting Job Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3-1 Troubleshooting with the System Health Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Job Card TSG001 - Solving Boot Phase Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1. Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2. Problems occurring at power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3. Problems encountered before login as SDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3-1 Run the HP Diagnostics Utility for Reliability Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3-2 For Disk Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3-3 For Problems Encountered Before Booting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4. Steps and problems encountered after login as SDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Job Card TSG002 - Problems When AW Browser Is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1. Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2. Problems description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3. PNF firewall settings remote checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Job Card TSG003 - Filesystem Checks and Repair - Daily Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1. Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2. Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3. Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4. Filesystem checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4-1 Check Partition Use on System Health Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4-2 Checking for the Filesystem full error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4-3 Other useful commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5. Daily Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5-1 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5-2 Restore the AW Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5-3 Daily_backup time change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6. Filesystem repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6-1 Foreword. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6-2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7. Log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Page no. 4 smTOC.fm

Table of Contents
7-1 To read the Log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

7-2 To read compressed Log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7-3 To write the logfiles on a USB key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8. Internal System and images disks organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Job Card TSG004 - Replacing Hard Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1. Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2. Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Job Card TSG005 - Using HP Diagnostics Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1. Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2. Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Job Card TSG006 - Solving Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1. Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2. Monitoring commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3. Using HP Diagnostics Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4. HTTP Server Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Job Card TSG007 - Using a USB Memory Device for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1. Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2. Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Job Card TSG008 - NEC LCD 1980SXi/1990SXI - Common Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1. Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2. Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4-2 First Installation Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4-3 Automatic Auto–Adjust Parameter Issue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4-4 Blank Screen Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Job Card TSG009 - Using System Logfiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
1. Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2. Logfile information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
smTOC.fm Page no. 5

Table of Contents
2-1 Installation logfiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

2-2 Logfile List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2-3 Reading Logfiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3. Using the SDC_CRASH utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4. Checking Logfiles Collected by Problem Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Job Card TSG010 - Information about Running Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1. Processes and brief explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2. Restartable processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2-1 Restarting the BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2-2 Application Hung. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3. Root menu scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Job Card TSG011 - Service Tools - Common Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2. Accessing the Common Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2-1 Locally on the workstation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2-2 Remote access from another AW (or another host) on the network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2-3 Remote access from InSite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3. Using the Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3-1 Home (System Health Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3-2 Error log Viewer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3-3 Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3-4 Configuration menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3-5 Utilities menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3-6 Image Quality/Calibration/Replacement/PM menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3-7 Anonymous Maker tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
4. GE Service Sites web links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5. GE Remote Update - Client Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5-1 Pre-requisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5-2 GERU Configuration steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5-3 GE Remote Update process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5-4 Manual execution of GE Remote Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5-5 Troubleshooting GE Remote Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5-6 Preventive Maintenance for GE Remote Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6. Applications Compatibility Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
7. Session Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7-2 Running Session Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7-3 Saving Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7-4 Using Saved Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7-5 Session Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Page no. 6 smTOC.fm

Table of Contents
7-6 Display Session Record Log Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

8. Applications Usage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8-2 Run Application Usage Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8-3 Configuring Application Usage Data Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9. Add Workstation IP to Firefox’s Non-proxied List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Job Card TSG012 - Create a BIOS CDROM & Flash the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
2. Check the BIOS and Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3. Upgrade BIOS on XW8400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3-1 Create a Flash CDROM for the XW8400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3-2 Flash the XW8400 BIOS and Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4. Upgrade BIOS on XW8600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4-1 Create a Flash CDROM for the XW8600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4-2 Flash the XW8600 BIOS and Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5. Upgrade BIOS on Z800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5-1 Create a Flash CDROM / USB for the Z800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5-2 Flash the Z800 BIOS and Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5-3 Verify Z800 BIOS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Job Card TSG013 - Using the ClamAV AntiVirus Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2. Activation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2-1 Configure crontab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2-2 Update virus signatures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2-3 Test ClamAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
2-4 Checking ClamAV Scan Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
2-5 Run ClamAV Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
2-6 Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Job Card TSG014 - Changing System Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2. Password Change Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2-1 Step 1 – Customer Consultation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2-2 Step 2 – Identify New Password(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2-3 Step 3 – Change Device Password(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2-4 Step 4 – Update Password(s) in Connectivity Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2-5 Step 5 – Communicate New Password(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2-6 Exceptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2-7 Password Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Job Card TSG015 - A3 Postscript Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
smTOC.fm Page no. 7

Table of Contents
2. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Chapter 3: Disassembly / Reassembly Procedures

1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2. Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3. Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4. Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4-1 LOTO Procedure for Advantage Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
5. Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5-1 HP workstation disassembly/reassembly procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5-2 Parts replacement instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5-3 Computer box replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5-4 Workstation case labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5-5 Send back the defective unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5-6 Replacement Network Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Chapter 4: Renewal Parts

Chapter 5: DICOM Filming
1. Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
2. Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
2-1 Laser Imager Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
2-2 Error and Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
2-3 Slow Transfer of Compressed Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3. Checks and utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
3-1 Communication Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
3-2 Utility Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
3-3 Accessing and using the log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
3-4 Changing the Print AET of your AW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
3-5 Older DICOM Printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Chapter 6: Options - Hardware and Software

1. Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
1-1 SCSI Hardware options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
1-2 Non SCSI Hardware options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
1-3 Applications (Software options) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
1-4 Other options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
3. DICOM optical disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4. Adding a Second Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4-1 Add 2nd Flat Panel LCD Color Landscape (1L1 >>> 2L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4-2 Removing 2nd Monitor From an Installed System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Page no. 8 smTOC.fm

Table of Contents
5. Memory Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

5-1 Z800 Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
5-2 XW8400 Workstation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
5-3 XW8600 Workstation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6. Advanced Applications (Software Options) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6-1 Volume Viewer applications package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6-2 Reporting Tool package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6-3 CT and Fusion Applications - Collector DVD Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6-4 MR Applications - Collector DVD package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6-5 X–ray Applications - Collector DVD Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6-6 PET and Networking Applications - DVD Collector Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
6-7 Other Applications packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
7. Other options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
7-1 Insite option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Chapter 7: Networking
1. Network configuration samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
1-1 Basic Hospital (Dicom) Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
1-2 Basic Hospital (Dicom) Network with "AW Server" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
1-3 Older Network configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
2. AW host declaration on the image sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2-1 AW4.6 Declaration on Unix / Linux Based Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2-2 AW4.6 Declaration on GENESIS Based Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2-3 AW4.6 Declaration on non Genesis Based Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2-4 AW4.6 Host Declaration on CT9800 Image Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2-5 AW4.6 Host Declaration on "Third Party" Dicom Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2-6 AW4.6 Declaration on DRS / DLX Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2-7 AW4.6 Declaration on YMS Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
3. Networking overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
3-1 General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
3-2 Modifying Routers and Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
3-3 More information on subnetworks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
3-4 Netmask Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Chapter 8: Planned Maintenance

Scenario PM000 - Planned Maintenance - Job Card Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
1. Job Cards list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
2. Preventive actions checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Job Card PM001 - Clean and Check Workstation and Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
1. Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
smTOC.fm Page no. 9

Table of Contents
2. Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
3. Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
5. Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
6. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
6-1 Cleaning monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
6-2 Keyboard and mouse cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
6-3 Workstation cleaning procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
6-4 Cables - visual checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Job Card PM002 - Site Parameters Back-Up and GIB Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
1. Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
2. Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4. Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
5. procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
5-1 Site Parameters Back-up on a CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
5-2 Site Parameters Restore from a CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5-3 GIB Declaration Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5-4 Upload Configuration to AWCTT website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Job Card PM003 - DICOM Printer Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
1. Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
2. Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
4. Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5. procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5-1 DICOM Printer adjustments and checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Job Card PM004 - Filesystem checks - Applications Compatibility Checks - GERU Update
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
1. Filesystem Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
1-1 Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
1-2 Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
1-3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
2. Applications Compatibility Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
2-1 Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
2-2 Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
2-3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
3. GE Remote Update Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Job Card PM005 - System Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Page no. 10 smTOC.fm

Table of Contents
1. Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
2. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
2-1 Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
2-2 Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
2-3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Job Card PM006 - Color Landscape Monitors - Adjustment Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
1. Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
2. Viewing Conditions Check and Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
2-1 Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
2-2 Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
2-3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Appendix 1 - Unpacking (HP Z800 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
2. Unpacking procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
3. Returning procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Appendix 2 - Glossary & Linux Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
1. Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
2. Linux commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
smTOC.fm Page no. 11

Table of Contents
Page no. 12 smTOC.fm

Legal Notes
Legal Notes
1 Trademarks
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
2 Copyrights
All Material Copyrighted(c) 2010 by the General Electric Company, All rights reserved.
3 Country of Manufacture
GE HealthCare – USA
GE HealthCare - France
4 Important Precautions
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Tова упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

• Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на клиента е да
(BG)
осигури превод.
• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали упътването за
работа.
• неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на доставчика на
услугата, оператора или пациентa в резултат на токов удар, механична или друга
опасност.
警告本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机械伤害或其他形式的伤
害。
警告本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他的危險。
警告本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險而受傷。
UPOZORENJE Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.
(HR) • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli ovaj servisni
priručnik.
• zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili pacijenta
uslijed strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
language warning.fm Page no. 13

Legal Notes
VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

(CS) • V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je zajištění překladu do
odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní návod a po
• chopili jeho obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka prodejního servisu,
obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu, respektive vlivem
mechanických či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.
(DA) • Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens ansvar at sørge
for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk stød,
mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.
(NL) • Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoordelijk voor de
vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding werd
geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de operator of
een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok, mechanische of andere
gevaren.
WARNING This service manual is available in English only.
(EN) • If a customer's service provider requires a language other than english, it is the customer's
responsibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been consulted and is
understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient from
electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles

(ET) • Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastutab
klient tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga
tutvumist ja sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või patsiendi
vigastamist elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.
(FI) • Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia, tarvittavan
käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt tämän huolto-
ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteiston
käyttäjän tai potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun
vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION Ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.
(FR) • Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'anglais, il
incombe au client de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce manuel d’installation et de
maintenance n'a pas été consulté et compris.
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur ou le
patient des blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
Page no. 14 language warning.fm

Legal Notes
WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.

(DE) • Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des Kunden
für eine entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und
verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des
Kundendiensttechnikers, des Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge,
mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.
(EL) • Εάν ο τεχνικός σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε γλώσσα εκτός των
αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει τις υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό αν δεν έχετε
συμβουλευτεί και κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Αν δεν προσέξετε την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός στον
τεχνικό σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή άλλους
κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.
(HU) • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő felelőssége a
fordítás elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben
leírtakat nem értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg
áramütés, mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.
(IS) • Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er það skylda
viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók hefur verið skoðuð og
skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda eða
sjúklings frá raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.
(IT) • Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente è
tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il presente
manuale ed averne compreso il contenuto.
• Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto alla
manutenzione, all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti meccanici o
altri rischi.
このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA)  サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業者の責
任で行うものとさせていただきます。
 このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでください。
この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、感電
や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .
(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우 , 번역 서비스를 제공하는 것은
고객의 책임입니다 .
• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지 마십
시오 .
• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계적 위험, 또는 기타 위험으로 인해 서비스
제공자 , 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을 입힐 수 있습니다 .

Legal Notes
BRÎDINÂJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

(LV) • Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, klienta pienākums ir
nodrošināt tulkojumu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena,
mehānisku vai citu faktoru izraisītu traumu risks apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai
pacientam.
ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.
(LT) • Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, suteikti vertimo
paslaugas privalo klientas.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio
eksploatavimo vadovo.
• Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus ar paciento sužalojimai
dėl elektros šoko, mechaninių ar kitų pavojų.
ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.
(NO) • Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar å
sørge for oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren, operatøren
eller pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.
(PL) • Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie usługi
tłumaczenia jest obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręcznikiem
serwisowym i zrozumienia go.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisanta,
operatora lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia
mechanicznego bądź innego.
AVISO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.
(PT-BR) • Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual, caberá ao
cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de
assistência técnica.
• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou
paciente decorrentes de choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.
(PT-PT) • Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este manual noutro idioma, é da
responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de
assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do
operador ou do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

(RO) • Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea engleză, este de
datoria clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui
manual de service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului sau
pacientului în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.

Legal Notes
ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на

(RU) английском языке.
• Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на английском, а
на каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно обеспечить перевод.
• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к
данному руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому, что
специалист по техобслуживанию, оператор или пациент получит удар
электрическим током, механическую травму или другое повреждение
UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.
(SR) • Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi prevodilačke
usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca ili
pacijenta usled strujnog udara ili mehaničkih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.
(SK) • Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu, poskytnutie
prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a
neporozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb,
obsluhujúcej osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné ohrozenie.
ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.
(ES) • Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el inglés,
el cliente deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido este
manual de servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servicios, el
operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas o de
otra naturaleza.
VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska. .
(SV) • Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska, ansvarar kunden
för att tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den här
servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på
serviceteknikern, operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar, mekaniska faror
eller andra faror.
OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.
(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka zagotoviti
prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razumeli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara, mehanskih ali drugih
nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DİKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.
(TR) • Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep ederse,
bunu tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen,
operatör veya hastanın yaralanmasına yol açabilir.

Legal Notes
5 Damage in Transportation
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In
Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE
representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and
containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an
inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 785 5052 or 8*323 5052 immediately after damage is
found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill
number, item damaged and extent of damage. Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in
Section S of the Policy And Procedures Bulletins. 14 July 1993
6 Omissions and Errors

Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives. GE personnel, please use the GEMS
TrackWise Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this publication.
7 Electrical Contractors
7-1 Certified Electrical Contractor Statement
All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power
Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors.
Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall be performed by
qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on
these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these
products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of
third–party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing
on the equipment.

Notes and Warnings
Notes and Warnings
Safety Terminology
The terms “danger”, “warning”, and “caution” are used throughout this manual to point out hazards and to
designate a degree or level of seriousness. Hazard is defined as a source of potential injury to a person. The
terms “important” and “note” are used to indicate other information you should be aware of. Familiarize
yourself with the following terminology descriptions:
Danger: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, may result in a
minor or moderate injury.
Important! Indicates information where adherence to procedures is crucial or where your comprehension
is necessary to apply a concept or effectively use the product.
Note: Provides additional information that is helpful to you. It may emphasize certain information regarding
special tools or techniques, items to check before proceeding, or factors to consider about a concept.
Used for instructions to the user to prevent damage to property.
definition-warning-notes.fm Page no. 19

Notes and Warnings
This page is intentionally left blank.
Page no. 20 definition-warning-notes.fm

How To Use the AW Service Docs
This chapter explains the range of support documents available, and how to find them.
1 Service Docs Overview
If you are an FE supporting AW4.6, the documents you will most commonly use are:
Manual name Content GE Part Number

AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6) To help you assess and plan site 5396257-100
Pre-Installation Manual (PIM) requirements before physical
installation of new systems. **
AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6) To guide you through physical 5393396-100

Installation Manual (IM) installation of new systems, instal-
lation, configuration and upgrade of
software and data. **
AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6) To guide you through planned 5396255-100

Service Manual (SM) maintenance and troubleshooting
procedures. **
RIS Synchronization (CCOW To help you configure and synchro- 5396254-100

and RIS-IC for AW 4.6 release) nize these services. **
Service manual
HP Z800 Workstation To help you configure and service 5396251-100
Service Manual the Z800. **
Floating License Installation/ To help you install and configure 5149787-100

Service Manual Floating Licenses for Applications.
** These manuals are provided

• On the AW4.6 SOFTWARE + ON–LINE DOC CDROM (Part No. 5393400-x, where x is replaced by a
revision number - always use the latest supplied revision). FEs are advised to copy these documents
onto their PC for easy reference.
• In the Service Docs collection installed on the AW4.6 workstation (Access from the Admin.\Service
Docs option on the AW browser Patient List screen). See section 2-1 Access to Service
Documentation.
• In the GE Tech Pub database:
• login to the site http://myworkshop.health.ge.com using your SSO
• From the Search menu, select Tech Pub Search... then Part Search
• On the Part Search screen, enter the document’s Part Number in the Name field
• Click the Search button
• Find the appropriate revision (latest Validated release) and click on the corresponding screen
icon in the Online column to display the PDF file, see example below:
How-to-use_AW46.fm Page no. 21

• Many documents are also available on the AW-IB web site at http://aw-ib.euro.med.ge.com/ but be
aware that the site is not controlled and the latest version of a document may not be available.
The AW Installation Manual is also provided in printed format with a new AW4.6 workstation.
Note: - All Job Cards referenced below that start with the letters IST are located in the AW4.6 Installation
Manual.
FEs are advised to copy the PDF versions of the manuals from the AW4.6 SOFTWARE + ON–LINE
DOC CDROM to their PCs for easy reference.
Important! Always use the latest supplied versions of the Service Documents.
2 On–Line Documentation
2-1 Access to Service Documentation
The AW Admin. menu displays a link to the Service Docs page. You can launch PDF versions of these
manuals from here.
Page no. 22 How-to-use_AW46.fm

2-2 Opening Service Documentation in New Browser Window or Tab
By default, the Service Documentation page opens in the current tab of the Mozilla Firefox internet browser. If
you then navigate to another Service Tools feature, the Service Documentation page you were consulting will
no longer be displayed. You can use the browser's Back button to return to the Service Documentation page.
To be able to consult Service Documents on the AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6) while using other Service Tools,
open the Service Documentation page in a new window, or in a separate browser tab.
• To open the Service Documentation page in a new window. Right-click on the Service Documentation link,
and select the option Open Link in New Window.
• To open the Service Documentation page in a new tab, right-click on the Service Documentation link, and
select the option Open Link in New Tab; alternatively, press Ctrl on the keyboard before clicking the
Service Documentation link. (The new tab will be titled Advantage Workstation.)
To close the current tab, use Ctrl + W
TIP: You can use the same methods to open new windows or tabs for several Service Tools pages, so that you
can use them all concurrently.
2-3 Access to the Operator’s Documentation

From the Patient List, click on the (?) icon to the right of the Filmer option. You can launch PDF versions
of these manuals from here. This collection also includes access to the installed Advanced Applications
Operator’s documentation.

2-4 Configure Acrobat Reader in Firefox

You can improve the navigation tools provided by default in the Firefox’s Acrobat Reader plug-in by
adding Next View and Previous View buttons. You can then use these to jump forwards and backwards
between two pages after following a hyperlink between two topics.
• Right-click on the embedded Acrobat Toolbar (see below).

• Select More Tools
• A pop-up list displays the tool buttons that you can install on the Toolbar
• Scroll down to the Page Navigation Toolbar section.

• Select Next View and Previous View.
• Click OK
• Two new buttons appear on the Acrobat Toolbar.

3 Key Installation Procedures

This section provides high-level flow diagrams of the Key Installation Procedures for the Advantage
Workstation, provided in the Installation Manual.
• For an overview of these Procedures, see the Quick Start Guide chapter.
• For detailed procedures themselves, see the individual Job Cards referenced.
Illustration 1 SET-UP NEW WORKSTATION
Go To AW IM, Follow this scenario to

Job Card IST000 - Installation/ set up and configure a
re-installation Scenarios new AW4.6 workstation
on site.
Illustration 2 ADD NEW APPLICATION (SOFTWARE OPTION)

Applications should preferably be installed/configured using the Easy Install utility (launch it from the
VolumeShare 5 browser using the Admin/Install packages menu option. See AW IM, Job Card IST005.
However, you can also install applications one by one, using the following method.
This can be a convenient way to install licenses remotely, for example:

Install new Application

softw are option?
For each new Application IST002
softw are option IST005
(AW IM )
N ext
option ¼ hour per option
Logical installation:
R un:
1 FE
install.<option_nam e>
IST009 (AW IM )
Turnover to C ustom er
¼ hour per option
- Test new ly installed Application options to test
D one
- Save updated C onfiguration on C D-R O M ¼ hour
1 FE
Illustration 3 LOAD FROM WARM: RE-INSTALL / UPGRADE AW CORE SOFTWARE & APPS
R e lo a d / u p g ra d e w o rk s ta tio n
w ith A W C o re s o ftw a re o n ly
L o a d A W C o re s o ftw a re fro m C D -R O M .
(C o n fig u ra tio n is s to re d o n h a rd d is k a n d a u to m a tic a lly re s to re d)
IS T 0 1 0 (A W IM )
If n e c e s s a ry, P re lo a d / In s ta ll A d v a n c e d A p p lic a tio n s fro m C D -R O M / C o lle c to r D V D
(V o lu m e V ie w e r A p p s, F u n c tio n a l A n a ly s is A p p lic a tio n s, e tc … ) 1 h o u r to s e v e ra l
h o u rs if m a n y
im a g e s o n h a rd
d is k
C h e c k c o n fig u ra tio n re -in s ta lle d :
- site p a ra m e te rs 1 FE
- h a rd w a re o p tio n s
- so ftw a re o p tio n s
- D IC O M a n d P o s tsc rip t p rin te rs
R e in s ta ll In S ite O R re s to re In S ite p a ra m e te rs
F in a l c h e c ks b e fo re tu rn o v e r to c u s to m e r
D one

Illustration 4 LOAD FROM COLD: RE-INSTALL / UPGRADE O.S. AND AW SOFTWARE
Illustration 5 INSTALL DEMO EXAMS

Acronyms
Illustration 6 SECOND MONITOR UPGRADE
Acronyms
AW / AW4.6 Advantage Workstation / Advantage Workstation 4.6 release

AW IM AW Installation Manual
AW PIM AW Pre-Installation Manual
AW SM AW Service Manual
CD / DVD CD-ROM / DVDrom
CSD Common Service Desktop
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
DC Direct Connect option
DPMS Display Power Management System
DNS Dynamic Network server
FE Field Engineer
FL / FLS Floating License / Floating License Server
FRU Field Replacement Unit
GERU GE Remote Update
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
MOD Magneto Optical Disk
NIC (card) Network Interface Controller (card)
NTP Network Time Protocol (server)
PNF Product Network Filters (this is the AW firewall product)
PSM Preferences Sharing Manager
SM Service Manual
SWD Software Download
USB Universal Serial Bus
VS5 AW VolumeShare 5

Publication Presentation
1 Scope
This AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6) Installation manual is to be used for the AW4.6 release running on the
HP Z800, XW8400 and XW8600 Workstation. (AW VolumeShare 5 is the name of the product delivered
to the customer.)
• This Installation Manual explains FE procedures for Installation and Upgrade.

• FE procedures for Preventive Maintenance and Troubleshooting are provided in the AW Service
Manual (SM).
Note: If the Advantage Workstation is part of a hospital vascular system, refer to vascular documentation
for specific installation instructions (e.g. connection to VGA graphics adaptor)
Important! AW VOLUMESHARE 5 (AW4.6) IS A 64-BIT SOFTWARE PLATFORM.

IT IS NOT SUPPORTED ON THE X4000, XW8000 AND XW8200 HARDWARE PLATFORMS.
1-1 Contents Summary
Chapter 1: Basic Tools and Procedures

This chapter provides some of the most useful, basic procedures and tools that engineers and
administrators will require from time to time to support the Advantage Workstation.
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting
This chapter provides Job Cards for common troubleshooting tasks, and tips for diagnosing
hardware and software problems. (These Job Cards are prefixed with the letters TSG.)
Chapter 3: Disassembly / Reassembly Procedures
This chapter summarizes procedures for hardware maintenance and spare part replacement. It
gives cross-references to the appropriate sections from the manufacturer's Service manuals.
Chapter 4: Renewal Parts
This chapter will help you find the part numbers for the Field Replaceable Unit you need to order.
Chapter 5: DICOM Filming
This chapter explains how to connect and configure validated Laser Cameras.
Chapter 6: Options - Hardware and Software
This chapter gives additional information about optional add-ons to the basic AW system:
- Peripheral devices
- Software options.
Where relevant, this includes details of configuration and diagnostics for the hardware options,
and uninstallation procedures for both hardware and software options.
Chapter 7: Networking
This chapter gives additional information about networking, such as subnetworks and routers.
Chapter 8: Planned Maintenance
This chapter provides Job Cards (procedures) for the most common planned maintenance
activities, for example checking peripheral devices.
publication-presentation_AW46.fm Page no. 29

Appendix 1: Unpacking (Z800 only)

The HP Z800 workstation is heavy and there are mandatory procedures for unpacking it and for
returning a defective FRU.
Appendix 2: Glossary and LINUX commands
Glossary of terms used in this manual, and summary of the most usual LINUX commands.
2 Conventions used in this Manual

Text and Messages in a Command Window are shown using the Courier font:
e.g: Do you want to continue [y,n,?,??,q]
Responses or commands to be typed in by the FE appear in bold characters:
e.g: ./install.aw
The Return or Enter hardkey is shown in bold characters and between brackets:
e.g : [Enter] or <Enter>
Keyboard hardkeys are shown in bold characters and between brackets:
e.g : <Alt> <F3>
Throughout the manual, the term ”local” is used to mean ”physically in front of” the AW
workstation console, while ”remote” means electronically connected through the network to the
workstation.
Menu options, to be selected by the FE appear in bold characters e.g:
3 Useful Links
If you run into problems during installation or maintenance of your AW, or want to check
if some
additional information exists on known issues, please consult the following Web sites
(for instance from a GE laptop with internet access):
• AW-IB web site:
http://aw-ib.euro.med.ge.com
Click on Service Manuals to get AW SM(s)
• HP Service information:
http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=16107
Page no. 30 publication-presentation_AW46.fm

Product Presentation
1 Feature Highlights
Table 1 Key New Features
New Features Description Doc Ref
New operating system In AW4.6, the operating system has been migrated from Red Hat Linux to
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11. This offers improved performance
and stability.
New hardware New AW4.6 systems are based on the HP Z800 workstation, featuring
platform radically improved architecture, ergonomics and a state of the art quad
processor. Upgrade to AW4.6 is supported from previous generation IM:
workstation hardware: HP XW8600 and HP XW8400. Chapter 4
Software
AW VolumeShare ™ 5 is available with two software configurations:
configurations
AW VolumeShare 5 with Volume Viewer, which includes the AW4.6

Software Platform and Volume Viewer, a 3D software package providing
Volume Analysis, rendering, navigation and whole suite of volumetric
visualization and analysis tools for CT, MR, 3D X–ray and PET.
AW VolumeShare 5 NO Volume Viewer, which includes only the AW4.6

Software Platform providing DICOM functions along with multi–modality
2D image viewer with dedicated functions for review of CT, MR, X–Ray,
DX, U/S and PET images, and the Filmer, a multimedia export tool.
New Volume Viewer Releases 10.X and higher of Volume Viewer Applications run on the
Applications AW4.6 or higher platform. They include the following new / enhanced IM:
applications: IST006
Volume Viewer Applications release 10.x
• Volume Viewer 5
• CardIQ Xpress 2.0
• CT Perfusion 4D (which replaces CT Perfusion 4)
• FlightPlan for Liver
• OncoQuant
• READY View
• Vessel IQ Xpress
• Volume Viewer Innova
Volume Viewer Applications release 11.x
• GSI Volume Viewer
• GSI MSI
• GenIQ
product-presentation_AW.fm Page no. 31

New Features Description Doc Ref
New AW Applications A new AW Application is available in conjunction with the AW4.6 release: IM:
AngioViz IST006
AngioViz is an application enabling the user to display color-coded
images; reflecting different characteristics related to vascular flow; from
GE DSA flat-panel (INNOVA) images.
Other New
NeuroMarQ
Applications for AW4.6 IM:
The NeuroMarQ application will aid physicians performing visual
or higher IST006
assessment and quantifying the uptake of [18F] Flutemetamol in PET
images of the human brain. (Flutemetamol is the new tracer for Beta-
amyloid plaque imaging.)
CardIQ Xpress Process
CardIQ Xpress Process is a software option of the CardIQ Xpress Reveal
product. CardIQ Xpress Process reduces coronary artery motion blurring
in CT images.
Table 2 New Service Tool Features
New software Description Doc Ref

feature
AW System Health Displays a "dashboard-style" summary of diagnostic data for system SM:
Page hardware and core software TSG011
AW Problem
Reporting:
Problem Report:
SM:
1. Problem Report Detects system crashes and automatically sends report to back office (by
TSG009
using ProDiags). (Transparent to user.)
Session Recorder:
2. Session Recorder - Assist customer in recording Complaint data (user actions, logs, SM:
comments...). Support done by Local&Remote FE, OLC. TSG011
- Register user actions and system status (CPU, disk usage, memory,
applications running, snapshots of screens, movies, ...).
- Provide export capacity (media).
Track Apps license and exam usage.

- Provide a basic Apps usage analyzer available on AW for User and SM:
Service. TSG011
Application Usage
Monitor - Export Recording file to back-office (by using ProDiags). Transparent to
user.
Page no. 32 product-presentation_AW.fm

New software Description Doc Ref

feature
CSD Enhancements: SM:

TSG011
Links to GEHC tools Provide new GEHC useful web links.
Provide Date and Daylight Saving Time (in System Healthpage)

Daylight Saving Time
Provide ‘Delete Router’ and ‘Delete Gateway’ from CSD. IM:
Routers IST002
uninstallation
IIP 4.0 New InSite/Ilinq package including "chat" feature for online IM:
communication between OLC and customer. IST008
EAT and EA3 CSD includes improved functionality for configuring EAT (Audit Trail) and IM:
configuration EA3 (Enterprise User Authentication) services IST004

Table 3 Obsolete / Out of Scope / Discontinued Features
Obsolete Features Description Doc Ref
Floppy disk drive No longer provided on the Z800 workstation.
Modem No longer provided or supported by AW software
AW4.6 is not supported on the following legacy (older) generation HP

Legacy workstations
workstations: X4000, XW8000 and XW8200
Seno Advantage
application AW4.6 does not support the Seno Advantage 2.2 application.
Discontinued The following applications were discontinued before AW4.6 and can no
applications longer be reinstalled on AW4.6 in the event of upgrade: IM:
• Advantage 3D X-Ray, Advantage 3D XR Coils Clips, Advantage IST005
Straight.
• Dentascan Plus.
• Smartscore 3.5: Existing upgrade path to Smartscore 4.0
• MASS 6, CV Flow 4
• HeartFusion: No replacing application in the event of a customer
upgrading, but several commercial options exist (Card IQ Physio,
use Xeleris for processing cardiac images, …).
The following application is discontinued on AW4.6 and can no longer be
installed on AW4.6:
• CT Perfusion 4 is replaced by CT Perfusion 4D in Volume Viewer
Applications (release 10.X and higher) with new license keys.
Upgrade paths are possible.
Important! Before upgrading a system to AW4.6, be careful to

contact your sales representative if such options are
installed on customer system.
A Fast Load DVD is no longer provided. Software is factory pre-installed
Fast Load DVD on new VS5 systems. Upgrade and support media will be provided as
needed.
There are no more hardware options.

Hardware options
Note: IM: AW Installation Manual

SM: AW Service Manual

2 Product Composition
The AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6) includes the following:
• The AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6) Multi-modality hardware Platform:

• 1 HP Z800 workstation
• 1 US English USB keyboard
• 1 USB Mouse and mouse pad
• 1 Multi-country power cords set
• 1 Ethernet RJ45 cable
Note: The initial Z800 workstation running AW VolumeShare5 has been introduced with the 4-core
Xeon X5550 CPU.
From Q1 2012 a new version of the Z800 workstation, featuring a new 6-core CPU (Xeon X5650)
is delivered.
FRUs are available for both versions of the Z800. When ordering a replacement workstation be
sure to order an identical part. See Chapter 4, Renewal Parts of the AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6)
Service Manual for FRU details.
• Z800 Memory options: There are three supported configurations: 6, 12 and 24Gb.
• To upgrade from 6 to 12Gb, you will receive a 6Gb Memory Package.
• To upgrade to 24Gb, you will receive a 24Gb Memory Package.
• Memory options are also available for the XW8600 and XW8400 workstations. See the Renewal
Parts chapter in this manual for FRU details.
• Service docs set (printed Installation Manual, Service Notes)
• 1 or 2 Color LCD Monitor(s), each consisting of:

• 1 Landscape NEC1990SXI or EIZO LCD color monitor including:
• 1 DVI-D/DVI-D video cable
• 1 Display Port-to DVI adapter
• 1 DVI/VGA video cable (DO NOT use unless otherwise advised)
• Software set:
• 1 USB memory stick containing AW License keys
• GEHC OS for AW4.6 DVD-ROM
• AW4.6 S/W + ON-LINE DOC CD-ROM
• 4 DVDs with major Applications
• 1 set of Demo Exams CD/DVDs
• AW4.6 Service Docs CD-ROM
• HP Hardware Diagnostics CD-ROM
• BIOS CD for Z800

Table 4 Hardware - Software compatibility Matrix
AW4.6_02 AW4.6_03 AW4.6_04
Z800 WORKSTATION Compatible Compatible Compatible

(4-CORE X5550 CPU)
Model: 5394794-2

(6-CORE X5650 CPU)
Model: 5394794-32
Important! When reinstalling AW software, it is recommended to use the latest available version.
AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6) is also supported on HP XW8600 and XW8400 workstations.
Note: The HP XW8200 workstation and other obsolete hardware are not supported.

Table 5 How to Determine the Configuration of a AW Product
Method From Do this Analyze results: examples
Check CPU box - Read the Manufacturing Rating Plate New AW4.6 systems carry the
Manufacturing right-hand Label Model number 5394794-2 (4-
Rating Plate Label side panel core X5550 CPU version) or
5394794-32 (6-core
X5650CPU version)
Check Serial No. Decode the Serial Number See the AW SM, Chapter 1 for
Manufacturing Label the decoding algorithm
Date
Check BIOS PhoenixBios Bios version can be checked from HP On the Z800, the BIOS should
version Setup Utility Invent screen at boot. It is displayed on be 3.07 or later (version 3.19 is
screen the screen bottom left corner. mandatory for the 6-core CPU
version of the Z800).
It can also be checked as follows: See AW SM, Job Card TSG012
- Switch on the workstation or reset the for more details of validated
workstation by pressing on the Reset versions for each workstation
button of the workstation. type, and for update
- Enter the BIOS setup menu by procedures.
pressing on the <F10> key, when
prompted.
- Select System Information in File
menu then check the BIOS version
corresponds to the latest validated
version.
- Exit from the PhoenixBios Setup
Utility screen by pressing the <Esc>
key then select Exit Discarding
Changes and press <Enter>.
Check Operating Command - Open a command window SUSE Linux version

System version line - Enter: more /etc/SuSE-release e.g.: SUSE Linux Enterprise
Desktop 11
Check AW4.6 AW browser \ - Click the Display Configuration button AW4.6_xx_EXT (where xx is
Core software Admin menu from the Admin menu the release number)
release - From the Environment Configuration i.e: AW4.6_02 or higher
section of the Configuration screen,
read the AW Version line
Check - From the Installed Applications

Applications section of the Configuration screen,
installed note the Application Name and
corresponding Version Information

Method From Do this Analyze results: examples
Check AW browser \ Click the Service Tools button from the See the AW SM, TSG011 for
Configuration Admin menu Admin menu details
summary The AW System Health Page displays.
3 Application Upgrades
In the case of an AW upgrade, four Software Applications Refresher DVDs Set (DVD Collector) are
supplied. Each DVD is a compilation of application installation media, allowing upgrades to applications
that are already installed and licensed.
A detailed list of the Applications compatible with AW4.6 at the time of product introduction, provided on
each DVD, is provided in Job Card IST005.
Important! Make sure that the customer is aware of the discontinued Apps (Table 3 in this chapter) before
performing the upgrade.
4 Software Release Version Numbering
• For future releases of AW platform and application software, the version numbering scheme will
change to reflect SFDA (Chinese) regulatory requirements.
• Minor version details will not be shown on screens in the AW User Interface, for any application.
• Software media will be labeled with details of the IB release, using the new format ext. 1, ext. 2, etc,
to denote incremental minor versions.
• For definitive version details of software installed, always refer to the Version Information listed by
using the workstation's Admin. \ Display Configuration menu option.
• Comprehensive details of workstation configurations are also available in backup files stored on
CDROM and/or on the AWCCT website. You can analyze this information using the AW
Configuration Analyzer Tool (AWCAT). For further information, see Job Card IST009 in the AW
Installation Manual.
Note: This document continues to contain references to previously released software using the existing
numbering scheme for minor versions, for compatibility with the Installed Base.
Note: Where references are made to software releases using the notation .X this means the information is
valid for all minor releases of the software in question. For instance, Volume Viewer Applications 11.X
means all minor releases of the corresponding software Master Release 11.

Basic Tools and Procedures
Chapter 1 Basic Tools and Procedures
1 Overview
This chapter provides explains the most common procedures that Field Engineers and administrators
are likely to require to support the Advantage Workstation.
2 Common Support Procedures

2-1 Basic Linux Procedures
2-1-1 Boot Advantage Workstation
Note: Make sure all peripheral devices are powered on!

Press on the ON/OFF Reset button, to turn ON the workstation and check for presence of all internal and
external powered–on peripherals, through the boot -up sequence messages.
Additionaly, you may enter the BIOS setup menu by pressing the <F10> key.
Press the <Esc> key and confirm by pressing <Enter>, to exit the BIOS setting menu.
The system now resets and start to boot up again.
2-1-2 Login as sdc on Advantage Workstation (windowing system not running)
If "<hostname> console login:" is not displayed, log out (see 2-1-8).
Login as sdc:
<hostname> console login: sdc <Enter>
Password: <sdc password><Enter> (default is adw4.6)
Advantage Workstation will start up. To shutdown, see 2-3-2.
2-1-3 Open a Command Window
A Command Window gives you direct acces to operating system commands and scripts. There are two
methods!
• Right-click with the mouse on the AW Desktop screen. This displays the Root menu. Use the mouse
to select the Service tools sub-menu, then select Command window.
• From the VolumeShare 5 browser’s Admin menu, select Command window.
2-1-4 Find out what ‘true’ user you currently are
echo $USER [Return]
The machine will return the user name it is operating under (e.g. root, sdc, insite).
Note: The user ’insite’ has root privilege. Remote users may not directly login as either root or insite. A
remote user must first login remotely as ’sdc’, then change it, if necessary.
2-1-5 Become sdc user after successful login to the Advantage Workstation as another user
Become sdc:
su – sdc [Enter]
Password: <sdc password> [Enter] (default is adw4.6)
2-1-6 Become root user after successful login to the Advantage Workstation as another user (locally
or remotely)
Become root:
su – root [Enter]
Password: <root password>[Enter] (default is operator)
Chap1_useful_procedures.fm Page no. 39 Chapter 1

2-1-7 Shutdown System from Login Prompt

Login as root
login: root [Enter]
Password: <root password>[Enter] (default is operator)
Open a Command window. (See 2-1-3)
At the command prompt, type in:
init 0 [Enter]
Optional: Wait for the workstation to shutdown and turn power OFF to the monitor(s), and peripherals.
2-1-8 Logout Procedure
Click on the Logout button, or select Exit AW from the Root menu, Service Tools.
2-1-9 Login as root on Advantage Workstation (windowing system not running)
If the Login window is not accessible, you must log out first (see 2-1-8).
Login as root:
Login: root [Enter]
Password: <root password> [Enter] (default is operator)
2-1-10 Remote Login to Advantage Workstation from a Remote Station (General Case)
You must know the Advantage Workstation’s Internet address. If you don’t, get it from the AW itself (see
2-1-13).
Telnet to the Advantage Workstation from a remote host:
<remote-prompt> telnet <AW Internet address> [Enter]
i.e : telnet 3.45.12.135 [Enter]
If telnet succeeds, the following lines display, and you get the “telnet login prompt”:
Trying <AW Internet address> ...
Connected to <AW Internet address>.
Escape character is ’^]’.
<...other system messages...>
login: <username> [Enter]
Password: <user_password> [Enter]
2-1-11 Remote Login as root on Advantage Workstation (from a Remote Station)
Direct remote login as root is not allowed. You must first login remotely as sdc, then switch user to root.
Telnet to the Advantage Workstation from a remote host (see 2-1-10).
At the telnet login prompt, you must firstly login as sdc:
login: sdc [Enter]
Password: adw4.6 [Enter] (sdc default password)
Then become super (root) user (see 2-1-6)
2-1-12 Remote Login as sdc on Advantage Workstation (from a Remote Station)

Telnet to the Advantage Workstation from a remote host (see 2-1-10).
At telnet login prompt, login as sdc:
login: sdc [Enter]
Password: adw4.6 [Enter] (sdc default password)
2-1-13 Find the Internet, Ethernet, and Broadcast Address, Netmask Value and Hostname
Chapter 1 Page no. 40 Chap1_useful_procedures.fm

• Open the System Health Page from the Service Tools \ Common Service Desktop, and verify the
Network section,
• OR use any of the following commands at the command prompt.
Open a Command Window and switch User to root (see 2–1–6)
To get the hostname, at the prompt type in:
hostname [Enter]
To get more information, at the prompt type in:
ifconfig –a [Enter] for details of the workstation’s Ethernet controllers
ifconfig eth0 [Enter] for details of the workstation’s main Ethernet controller (eth0):
(see example below)
eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:E0:81:00:54:F8
inet addr:3.249.12.149 Bcast:3.255.255.255 Mask:255.0.0.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:90056 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:36555 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:54610697 (52.0 Mb) TX bytes:7398817 (7.0 Mb)
Interrupt:21 Base address:0xf000
Where inet is the Internet Protocol (IP) address
Mask is the host’s netmask value (in hex)
HWaddr is the Ethernet Address
Bcast is the Broadcast Address
2-1-14 Shutdown and Reboot AW Locally or Remotely from the Command Line
Make sure you are logged in as root on he Advantage Workstation.
Shutdown and Reboot:
init 6 [Enter]
Note: If remote login as root on he Advantage Workstation failed, remote reset is impossible.
Reset is then only possible locally.
2-1-15 Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally (i.e. no input from keyboard)
Important! USE ONLY IN CASE OF SYSTEM HANG. CAN CAUSE LOSS OF DATA. Database recovery process
will be necessary if used while the Database was active. (See 2–6 for Recover Database)
• Reset the workstation
• Press on the Reset button, or cycle power off and on to workstation.
2-1-16 Shutdown and Reboot AW Locally: Workstation “Hard Blocked”
Turn monitor and computer off.
Wait about 30 seconds.
Make sure other peripherals are powered on. Turn monitor and computer on.
The system will bootup.

2-1-17 Changing the ”USER” Password
Important! DO NOT CHANGE THE ”insite”, ”sdc”, OR ”root” PASSWORD WITHOUT NOTIFYING YOUR
SUPPORT CENTER (OLC [ON–LINE CENTER], OLC–E [EUROPEAN SUPPORT CENTER], OLC–A
[ASIAN SUPPORT CENTER]).
Changing User passwords can be done either:
• Through the Common Service Desktop (CSD) Configuration menu, accessible through the User
Interface by selecting Admin\Service Tools
• OR by opening a Command Window and...
1. Switching user to root
su – root [Enter] ”su [space] dash [space] root”
Password: <root password> [Enter] (default is operator)
2. Running the install.passwords script
cd /export/home/sdc/install [Enter]
./install.passwords [Enter]
Enter the name of the user whose password must be changed
- root - sdc_admin (administrator) sdc or type q to quit
Select the user root, sdc or sdc_admin:
Changing password for user -user- (where ”user” = root , sdc, or sdc_adminstrator)
New password : xxxxxxxx [Enter]
Retype new password : xxxxxxxx [Enter]
passwd : all authentification tokens updated successfully
Note: MAKE SURE THAT THE CAPS–LOCK KEY IS NOT ENGAGED BEFORE ENTERING THE PASSWORD.
Note: f you get a message like ...

BAD PASSWORD : it (is based on) (is too short) (does not contain) ..
.... it is just a WARNING message to let you know that your choice for the new password is
not as secure as it should be. However, your password will be taken into account after typing
it a second time.
Write the new password on the AW CONFIGURATION FORM (AW Installation Manual, Chapter
3).
2-1-18 Line Commands for Controlling Printer (Filming) Queues
See Chapter 5, DICOM Filming, section 3-2.
2-1-19 Changing the Hostname
Unconfigure the Advantage Workstation (See 2-1-24).
2-1-20 Host Identification (License ID or licenseid)

Note: The hostid command, formerly used for UNIX workstations must no longer be used to calculate the
keys !!!! The hostid command only shows the numeric identifier of the hardware platform which is the
same for all workstations.
i.e : HP XW8400 workstation : hostid = 7f0100
The licenseid is a unique alphanumeric keystring that is generated in relation to the workstation’s eth0
controller.
The A.W software protection key is factory determined from this number (MAC address).
There are several ways to find the workstation’s licenseid:
• Consult the workstation’s configuration: Admin.\Display Configuration
• Consult the System Health Page: Admin.\Service Tools
• At the command prompt type in:
/export/home/sdc/bin/licenseId [Enter] (capital I for licenseId)
2-1-21 Using the ”man” Command
On–line information about Linux commands and their usage may be obtained by using the man
command. For example, to find out more about using vi:
Switch user to root
su – root [Enter]
Enter the root password when prompted
/usr/bin/man vi [Enter] (type q to exit when done)
To find out more about using the man pages, type in:
/usr/bin/man man [Enter] (type q to exit when done)
2-1-22 Routing Tables
Viewing the routing tables and usage
netstat –r [Enter]
i. e :
Kernel IP routing table
Destination Gateway Genmask Flags
MSS Window irtt Iface
3.0.0.0 * 255.0.0.0 U
40 0 0 eth0
127.0.0.0 * 255.0.0.0 U
40 0 0 lo
Editing the Routing table
See Chapter 7 section 3-2 Modifying Routers and Gateways for more information.
2-1-23 Netmasks
Note: No manual edit for changing the Netmask.

Use the ”sys–reconfig” utility (2–1–24) to change hostname, IP address and netmask, or
Refer to Chapter 7, Networking for specific examples.
No longer use the sys–unconfig utility from UNIX systems !!!!!
Reboot the workstation (see 2-1-1).

2-1-24 Reconfiguring the Advantage Workstation (Removing all Current Hostname,Timezone,

Network, and Addressing Information)
Login as root or switch User to root.
Important! DO NOT USE the /usr/sbin/sys–unconfig utility, which may lead to the LINUX reconfiguration
process. !!! USE the sys–reconfig script INSTEAD !!!
Run the sys–reconfig script:
sys–reconfig [Enter]
WARNING : THIS SCRIPT WILL SHUTDOWN THE STATION AND LET YOU MODIFY
THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS DURING THE NEXT REBOOT:
- hostname
- IP address
- subnet mask
- timezone
- Enter date and time
Do you want to continue (y/n) ? y [Enter]
Done.
Do you want to shutdown the station now? (y/n) y [Enter]
The system automatically performs a shutdown.
When the system displays the message Power down and turns OFF, you can press on the ON/OFF
button to reboot.
For details of reconfiguration, see AW IM, Job Card IST001.
Note: You may also use the ”yast2 timezone” client, if you simply need to change date/time parameters:
yast2 timezone [Enter]
The Clock and Timezone Properties window displays. Use this to modify and save the date/time.
Important! Always reboot the workstation after modifying time and date settings.
2-1-25 Changing the Internet Address
Unconfigure the AW as shown above, if not familiar with the vi editor!
Switch User to root, to obtain write access before editing the ”ifcg–eth0” file.
Using the vi editor, change the internet address in: /etc/sysconfig/network/scripts/ifcg–eth0
Do not change the host name !!!!
Shutdown and reboot the workstation (see 2-1-7).
2-1-26 File Systems Checks: Windowing System not Running
You can use the xfs_check and xfs_repair commands to check and repair a damaged file system.
2-1-27 Check for SCSI Devices recognized by the Workstation during Boot
Switch User to root.
Display the SCSI peripherals recognized by the workstation:
/bin/dmesg | grep SCSI [Return]

Note: If the peripherals are present (connected and powered ON), and you do not see these
messages, check connections, power, and restart workstation (see 2-1-1)
2-2 Restart Advantage Workstation from the Console

2-2-1 Advantage Workstation OK, no one logged in
Login as sdc (see 2-1-5).
If the AW software is not up within 1 minute, see Chapter 2, Troubleshooting.
2-2-2 Advantage Workstation OK, sdc logged in BUT AW software is not running
Select Restart AW from the Exit Menu.
If AW software is not up within 2 minutes, see Chapter 2, Troubleshooting.
2-2-3 Advantage Workstation OK, someone else logged in
Logout (see 2-1-8).
Login as sdc (see 2-1-5).
If AW software is not up within 1 minute, see Chapter 2, Troubleshooting.
2-3 Shutdown Advantage Workstation

2-3-1 Windowing system not running –– login prompt displayed
See 2-1-7.
2-3-2 Advantage Workstation running –– Normal Shutdown (including computer shutdown)
Place cursor of the mouse over the SYSTEM icon on the Browser.
Select Shutdown button on the Browser, and click left mouse button.
Place cursor over Yes push button in pop–up message, and click left mouse button.
Wait until shutdown has completed.
Optional – turn monitor, computer, and external SCSI devices off.
2-3-3 Advantage Workstation running –– Stop application only
Place cursor over LOGOUT icon on the Browser, and click left mouse button.
Release the mouse button. Advantage Workstation will stop, a login prompt will display.
2-3-4 Advantage Workstation not running and Windowing system running
Exit the program you are using, shutdown from login prompt (see 2-1-7). –OR–
If that fails, or unknown, kill windowing system (see 2-3-6). –OR–
Move the mouse outside of all the windows (into the background).
Press a mouse button to get the Root menu, scroll to Service Tools, then to Logout.
Release the mouse button. The windowing system stops, a login prompt will display.
2-3-5 AW not running and windowing system running ––– Kill Application locally
Open Console window (double click on CONSOLE icon), place the cursor inside the new window.
Run the following script:
cd /export/home/sdc/scripts [Enter]
./sdcapp.csh –k [Enter]
If this failed (Advantage Workstation still running), kill windowing system (see 2-3-6).

2-3-6 Windowing system blocked ––– Kill Windowing System remotely

From a remote station, login to th AW as sdc.
If this is impossible, reboot the workstation locally.
If AW software is up, run the sdcapp.csh –k script (see 2-3-5).
If AW software is down, become user root (see 2-1-6).
Shutdown and reboot the workstation :
init 6 [Enter]
Wait for boot completion before login again.
If remote reboot is impossible, reset the AW locally (see 2-1-14).
2-4 Advantage Workstation and Site Configuration

2-4-1 Displaying or saving Advantage Workstation Site Configuration Information
The site configuration information can be displayed and/or saved by selecting the Display
Configuration and/or Save Configuration option from the Admin menu (see screen shot below).
A pop up window displays information such as O.S version, processor type, internet address, installed
Applications licence keys, etc... relative to your configuration. When running the Save Configuration
process, always accept to format the diskette so it is properly DOS formatted.
Note: Much of the configuration information, except for Applications, is available on the System Home Page
(Admin.\Service Tools)
2-4-2 Changing Advantage Workstation Site Configuration Settings

Refer to AW IM, Job Cards IST002, IST008 and IST009, for details of how and when to modify the
workstation configuration to take into account site parameters and operating requirements.
2-5 Adobe Acrobat Reader Tool

To start the Acrobat Reader tool, open a Command Window from the ROOT Menu and type in
geacroread [Enter]
2-6 Advantage Workstation Database Recovery

Recover the database if the application crashes when opening a series, or when the browser lists do not
match the actual set of images on the disk.
This operation resets the relational database, reads the images from the hard disks, and recreates the
database from scratch.
Important! THE DATABASE RECOVERY PROCESS CAN TAKE UP TO 60 MINUTES, DEPENDING ON THE
NUMBER OF IMAGES ON THE DISK(S) OR LONGER IF EXTERNAL STORAGE DISKS PACK OPTION
INSTALLEDMAKE SURE THAT NOBODY IS USING THE WORKSTATION BEFORE STARTING
”RECOVER DATABASE” REMOTELY.
2-6-1 Recover Database from the Root Menu
Advantage Workstation must be up and running.
If exams have no series, series have no images, or images cannot be displayed or removed, there
probably is some database corruption which has occurred. This problem can occur if the system was
powered off during images receive and database update.
The database can be recovered by selecting the Recover database option from the Services Tools
menu under the Root menu.
Note: To access the Root menu, you may need to iconify the AW User Interface first, by pressing on the
<Alt> <F3> keys
Enter the root password when prompted.
Important! THE DATABASE RECOVERY PROCESS CAN TAKE UP TO SEVERAL HOURS, DEPENDING ON THE
NUMBER OF IMAGES ON THE DISKS. MAKE SURE THAT NOBODY IS USING THE WORKSTATION
BEFORE STARTING ”RECOVER DATABASE” REMOTELY.
The following message displays :
Do you want to rebuild the database from the images ?
This operation can take a long time.
Please type ’rebuild’ to confirm, or just press <Enter> to quit :
rebuild [Enter]
A screen saver displays. There is no possibility to use the system during this time.

If you click on right mouse button, The following message appears:

PLEASE WAIT ......
DATA BASE IS BEING RECONSTRUCTED
When this is done, use the Root Menu\Restart AW option to restart the software.
Important! DURING A RECOVER DATABASE, IMAGES WHICH HAVE FAILED TO BE REINSTALLED ARE STORED
IN THE /export/home1/sdc_image_pool/failed_to_reinstall DIRECTORY. YOU SHOULD AT
LEAST CLEAN UP THIS DIRECTORY BUT FIRST, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO CONTACT YOUR ON LINE
CENTER AW SUPPORT WHICH WILL ASK YOU TO SEND FAILED IMAGES FOR INVESTIGATION.
2-7 Using the SMPTE Pattern

This section describes how to display the SMPTE pattern to properly calibrate the monitor.
2-7-1 Displaying the SMPTE pattern.
• Start AW application if it is not currently running.
• Install the SMPTE pattern (and other test patterns) by selecting Install SMPTE from the Admin
• button.
• The SMPTE pattern is loaded into the browser as an exam with the name of SMPTE Pattern.
• Open the Browser (Patient list), then select SMPTE pattern to display.
2-7-2 Color Landscape Monitor(s) Adjustment Procedure

The console monitor must be properly adjusted for the filmed image to accurately represent the console
monitor displayed image. The following procedure is the recommended setup of the Console Monitors to
achieve a filmed image which accurately represents the monitor displayed images. The SMPTE (Society
of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) test pattern is used to provide a standard image.
There are factors pertaining to console monitor adjustments which will affect the ability of the film to
accurately represent the console monitor displayed images. These factors, the console monitor contrast
and brightness, are adjusted so all the shades of grey are discernible without excessive brightness
under normal viewing ambient lighting. The SMPTE test pattern also enables an easy check of focus and
linearity / geometry of the display.
The final result should make the film image and the console monitor displayed image similar in

appearance. The console monitor window and level may be adjusted for viewing preference, however
the console monitor brightness and contrast should not be changed since the display is optimized for the
video signal input.
Display: The screen is black
Display SMPTE test pattern on monitor. See sample test pattern above.
Window Width control value = 100.
Window Level control value = 1024.
Note: To achieve the best results, it is important that this setup procedure be done under the normal
ambient lighting conditions for the console area.
Locate the contrast and brightness control knobs on the bottom front of the monitor.
Adjust contrast control of display monitor to extreme minimum contrast (furthermost counter clockwise
position on). No contrast results in a flat density image.
Adjust brightness control until scanning raster is just perceptible.
Adjust contrast control such that the brightest part of the image is at a comfortable viewing level.
All shades or grey should be discernible. The two additional areas of the grey scale, which contain sub–
patches with 5% density differences, should also be visible. See Illustration 3, circled number 6. (i.e.
Adjust until viewing of brightest area is comfortable, then adjust to ensure all shades of grey can be
seen).
Other aspects of display to check
(See circled numbers in image on Sample Test Pattern below).
– High and low contrast resolution patterns, in both horizontal and vertical directions, must be
discernible. (Numbers 3 and 4).
– In the regions of white and black windows, there should be no smearing or streaking of the interior
rectangle into the surrounding, contrasting region. Windows must appear sharply
defined. (Numbers 1, 2, 5–8)
– Focus may be checked by observing the characters embedded in the image and readjusted if
necessary using the control knob (19’ monitor) or remote control (20’ monitor).
– The size of the 512 pixels square image on the display should measure 7.25” x 7.25” (18.45 cm x
18.45 cm).

The entire display image, including grey scale and patient data, should be centered in the window frame.
(Number 9).
2-7-3 Create and Display a Coloured SMPTE Pattern

This can be usefull to check the color rendering of a color printer. In order to create a ”colored’”
SMPTE pattern, proceed with the following steps:
Install the SMPTE pattern if not done yet (see 2-7-1).
Start the VIEWER to display the SMPTE pattern.
Click on the Display Tools button. The Display Tools window pops–up.
Click on the WW/WL button. The Drag & drop a tool window pops–up.
Click on the Palette button, then click on the Rainbow button.
Press the middle button on the mouse and modify the color palette.
When this is done, you can save the coloured SMPTE pattern if you wish to use it again later:
Select Edit from the Display Tools menu (see above).
Click on the Save Image button.
2-8 How to find the Manufacturing date of a Workstation

You can decode the workstation’s Manufacturing date from the Serial number.
You can find the Serial number

On the barcode label stuck on the workstation.
On the System Health Page.
On the Display Configuration screen
The serial number is composed of 10 digits, e.g. CCSYWWXXXX You can decode it as follows:

CC: Country Code e.g. GB -> Great Britain, CZ -> Czech Republic…
S: Site Code Designator e.g. 8
Y: Year e.g. 9 -> 2009, 0 -> 2010, 1 -> 2011…
WW: Week or the year in ISO format e.g. 01, 02, 30, 52
XXXX: Code to create a Unique Identifier.


Troubleshooting
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
1 Foreword
The troubleshooting procedures are described in a series of job cards about the different steps, problems
encountered with their corrective actions and useful procedures, when installing and using the Advantage
Workstation.
Important! Corrective action should be made by properly qualified and authorized personnel only.
2 Troubleshooting guide: HP Z800, XW8600 and XW8400

On–line access to HP Service Manuals and other additional information can be obtained from the HP
documentation Web site at :
http://www.hp.com
type the workstation model (Z800, XW8600 or XW8400) in the ”Search” window. Select the Product and
then Product manuals links.
PURPOSE HP Z800 HP XW8600 HP XW8400

SERVICE MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL
5396251 –100 5308736–100 5180567–100
CHAPTER – PAGE CHAPTER – PAGE CHAPTER – PAGE
NR NR NR
SOLVING HARDWARE PROBLEMS 6-210 5-118 / 5-130 5–117
POWER LED IS FLASHING 6-245 5-116 / 5-136 5–98 / 5–104
POWER–ON SELF–TEST (POST) 6-245 5-116 5-123

UNDERSTANDING THE DIAGNOSTIC
LEDS
TROUBLESHOOTING WITH THE E– n/a 5-116 5–104

BUZZER
CD–RW & HARD DISK PROBLEMS 6-227, 6-228 5-124 / 5-133 5-111 / 5-120
CLEARING THE ADMINISTRATOR 4-38 7-154 APPDX H–176

PASSWORD
POWER SUPPLY TEST 6-225 5-120 5–107
SOLVING DISKETTE/DRIVE 6-227 5-122 5–109

PROBLEMS
SOLVING DISPLAY PROBLEMS 6-230 5-125 5–112
SOLVING KEYBOARD / MOUSE 6-217 5-128 5–115

PROBLEMS
SOLVING NETWORK PROBLEMS 6-217, 6-223 5-131 5–118
SOLVING MEMORY PROBLEMS 6-234, 5-158 5-132 5–119
chap2_troubleshooting.fm Page no. 53 Chapter 2

Troubleshooting
3 Troubleshooting Job Cards

Use the table below to identify the Job Card(s) that most closely match problems or service tasks. These
Job Cards are located sequentially in this Chapter.
Job Card Nr Purpose
TSG001 Solving Boot Phase Problems
TSG002 Problems When AW Browser Is Running
TSG003 File-Systems Checks and Repair- Daily Backup
TSG004 Replacing Hard Disks
TSG005 Using HP Diagnostics Tool
TSG006 Solving Network Problems
TSG007 Using a USB Memory Device for Service
TSG008 NEC LCD monitors - Common Issues
TSG009 Using System Logfiles
TSG010 Information about Running Processes
TSG011 Service Tools - Common Service Desktop (CSD)
TSG012 Create a BIOS CD-ROM and Flash the Firmware
TSG013 Using the ClamAV AntiVirus Tool
TSG014 Changing System Passwords
TSG015 A3 Postscript Printing
3-1 Troubleshooting with the System Health Page
The AW System Health Page will give you a high-level snapshot of the status of critical
hardware and software, and should be one of the first things you check. It is displayed as the
Home Page when you access the Common Service Desktop (Admin.\Service Tools option from
the AW browser Patient List).
For full details, see Job Card TSG011.
Chapter 2 Page no. 54 chap2_troubleshooting.fm

Job Card TSG001 - Solving Boot Phase Problems
1 Foreword
This Job Card aims to help you solve problems that may occur during the initialization or boot sequence,
(before the AW browser is loaded).
2 Problems occurring at power up
Symptom Recommended Action Suspect module
The screen - Check electrical and video cables and connectors - Monitor
remains blank - Swap monitor(s) with another one for test - Video card
- Check LED color on the CPU box. Search for blinking red. Refer - CPU box
to HP Service Manual provided with the workstation.
Blurred video or - Adjust or replace the monitor - Monitor

pour color. - Disconnect temporarily the video splitter (if applicable) for test. - Video splitter
- Replace the video cable and/or Y adapter cable - Video cables
- Replace the video card - Video card
Display: The - Check if monitor’s LED is lit (yellow = power on, green = power - CPU box
screen is black on + video present) - Monitor power
- Check that the monitor power cord is properly inserted. supply
- Check that video cables are properly connected. - DVI- adapters
- Replace Y adapter cable (xw8600 or xw8400), Display Port-to- - Y adapter cable
DVI adapter(s) (Z800), video cable(s) and/or monitor. - Monitor cables
- Check if LED is blinking red on the CPU box - Graphics card
- If all else fails, consider replacing the Graphics card
The workstation - The workstation does not boot up and beeps in sequence. Refer - CPU box
beeps to the HP Service Manual provided with the workstation for beep
error codes meaning.
The workstation - The workstation does not boot up and beeps in sequence. - CPU box
beeps - It is possible that the insertion of the Y video cable into the - Y video cable
Graphics card Y connector (xw8600 or xw8400) has been forced
upside/down.
Check that the Y adapter cable is properly inserted into the
Graphics card output connector
During boot, - Check the Ethernet connection - Connection

message: - Check the RJ45 Ethernet cable - Ethernet cable
"eth0- no carrier" - Make sure the Ethernet cable is connected to the PCI Ethernet - Connection
card and not to the Mother board Ethernet port (reserved for
"Direct connect" option).
- Replace the PCI Ethernet card. See Chapter 6. - NIC Ethernet card
tsg001_AW.fm Page no. 55

The screen blanks - Check that the NEC monitor is properly configured to receive the - NEC monitor
at the end of the type of video which the Video card is sending: configuration.
boot sequence. - Standard AW uses Display Port-to-DVI adapter cables (Z800) or
DVI-D digital Y adapter cable (xw8600 or xw8400) and video
cable, so the monitor DVI input shall be configured as "digital"
- Vascular AW may pass through a VGA video splitter, and use
Display Port-to-DVI adapter cables (Z800) or DVI-D digital Y
adapter cable (xw8600 or xw8400) and DVI/VGA video cables, so
the DVI input of the NEC monitor should be configured as
"Analog".
Refer also to TSG008.
Display is reduced Pre-requisite: The workstation shall be turned on. - NEC monitor
to a small part in - Turn off the monitor configuration
the center of the - Turn on the monitor while keeping the "Select 1/2" button
screen. depressed.
- Push the ">" key to go to "Tab 7" and press "Select 1/2" button
- Push the ">" key to go to "Magnifying glass" symbol
- With the "+" and "-" keys, choose "Full", then press "Select 1/2"
button
- Press "Exit" twice to save and quit.
Different color tints Monitors adjustments shall be done. - NEC monitors

on dual monitors Order Tool 0216 from the Pool of Tools. Consult OLC for details. adjustments
configurations.
Screen display is - Re-orient the monitor - Monitor

twisted - Place the monitor further away from the MR scanner or any - Magnetic field
power transformers.
Message: You have left a USB memory stick connected and you are - USB port
"Attempting to boot attempting to reboot the workstation.
from USB device. Remove the USB memory stick and cycle power to the
Disk error. Press workstation.
any key to restart"
3 Problems encountered before login as SDC

3-1 Run the HP Diagnostics Utility for Reliability Diagnosis
Refer to Job Card TSG005.
3-2 For Disk Problems

See Job Card TSG004.
3-3 For Problems Encountered Before Booting

Check the BIOS settings (using the HP Setup utility - press F10 at startup). Reinstall default settings if
necessary and reboot.
See Job Card TSG012, for BIOS configuration and upgrade procedures.
Page no. 56 tsg001_AW.fm

4 Steps and problems encountered after login as SDC
Message: "Invalid This message is normal when installing a new workstation, prior to incorrect or missing
Software Key for have entered the AW license key. software license
Advantage Check the software license key, that shall match the "licenseId" key.
Workstation" number for your workstation. Enter / re-enter key as explained by
AW IM, Job Card IST002.
Message: "Invalid You have attempted to extract the AW license key from the USB USB memory stick
Software Key for memory stick delivered by Manufacturing for a new station.
Advantage AW License key can only be entered manually (or restored from incorrect or missing
Workstation" the AW configuration CD-ROM). software license
key.
Remove the USB memory stick, and follow instructions from AW
IM, Job Card IST002, to enter the AW license key manually.
Message: "Invalid Upgrades or FRU swap: You have restored the whole incorrect or missing
Software Key for configuration from the AW configuration CD-ROM of an older AW software license
Advantage workstation. key.
Workstation" Run the command licensId <Enter> to know the actual license ID
of your workstation, prior to contacting OLC to get new keys for
the workstation.
Password is - login as root and enter root password /etc/password or

refused when login - Open a Terminal and type: /etc/shadow files
as "sdc". Message: passwd sdc <Enter> have been changed
"Sorry!" Enter a new password for sdc when prompted, and confirm. or corrupted.
- Logout from root and login as sdc
After software The password from a previous AW release has been restored /etc/password or
upgrade, password from the AW Configuration CD (for instance during upgrade from /etc/shadow files
is refused when AW 4.5). have been changed
login as "sdc". Login with old password first, then refer to AW IM, Job Card
Message: "login IST002 to change password.
incorrect" You may as well use procedure described above.
Password is You have configured your workstation with a local language, but - Initialization
refused when login you have kept the default US keyboard. - Hardware
as "sdc". Message: It is possible that you have kept the "automatic: keyboard layout - Software reload
"login incorrect" follows language" setting, instead of selecting the US keyboard
setting.
- Locate a local language keyboard on a secretary PC or RIS PC
in the hospital and note the correspondence between US keybd
and local keybd, in order to be able to login on the AW.
OR
- Telnet as "sdc" from another host on the network
- run the /export/home/sdc/install/install.site script and change the
keybd layout setting accordingly.
Loss of root Proceed with the full software reload from cold (OS + AW). Refer OS
password to AW IM, Job Card IST011.

Loss of system files Proceed with the full software reload (OS + AW). Refer to AW IM, OS
Job Card IST011.
After replacement When the additional Ethernet card (eth0) fails, the Ethernet - NIC
of a defective NIC controller (eth1) on the Mother board takes the lead and becomes - OS
Ethernet card, it is eth0. - LicenseId
necessary to After replacement of the defective Ethernet card (NIC), proceed
declare this board with the sys–reconfig steps, in order to restore its priority over the
to the system in
order to activate it. Ethernet controller of the Mother board.
Refer to chapter 1, section 2–1–24 for details.
When this is done, call your OLC with the "licenseID” number, in
order to have new license keys calculated for your new NIC card.
See also Chapter 3, section 5-6 Replacement Network Card.
No window opens - Shutdown and reboot workstation - Initialization

- Launch HP Diagnostics (see AW IM, Job Card TSG005) - Hardware
- Reload AW software (see AW IM, Job Card IST010) or - Software reload
- Reload complete software (OS + AW). see AW IM, Job Card
IST011)

Job Card TSG002 - Problems When AW Browser Is Running
1 Foreword
This Job Card aims to help you solve problems that may occur once the AW browser is running.
2 Problems description
Mouse: Cursor is - reboot workstation, then Restart AW browser (Ctrl-Alt- - OS / servers

"late" with respect Backspace) - Network
to actual mouse - Check if images are being sent to the workstation, which could
movements. slow down the workstation. - CPU box
Slow response to - Run the HP Diagnostics tool to test the hardware
clicks on mouse
buttons.
Mouse: Cursor is - reboot workstation, then Restart AW browser (Ctrl-Alt- - OS / servers

stuck. Does not Backspace) - mouse
respond to mouse - replace the mouse
movements.
Display: Display is - The NEC monitors must have the auto-adjust parameter set to - NEC monitors
out of the screen "OFF". Refer to AW IM, Job Card IST002, section 5-4.
limits
Display: Monitor - Enter the OSD menu to reset the calibration parameters: - Monitor
adjustment have – Click Exit button adjustment
been modified by – Click 5 times on > button to move to 2nd toolbox tab.
the customer and – Click Select 1/2 button to enter 2nd toolbox.
need to be reset. – Click 8 times on > button to move to Factory Presets.
– Click Select 1/2 button to select
– Click Reset button to accept
– Proceed with monitor fine adjustment
– Click twice on Exit button to close the OSD menu
Display: Dual For color calibration of the LCD monitor(s), please order "LCD - Monitor
Monitor color analyzer", from the ”pool of tools” and refer to Service note adjustment
configuration. SNAW2002–009 instructions delivered with the Tool or available
Cannot match the from the AW–IB web site
colors of the 2 @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
monitors
Keyboard: Layout This may occur in some cases after using yast2 configuration yast2
reverts to default features. If this happens, reconfigure using the Admin. menu,
(US AZERTY) Service Tools option, then click Configuration, and select
Configure single feature \ Site Parameters \ Keyboard Layout,
then click Save Parameters. You will need to reboot the
workstation to apply the change.

Shutdown: - Check if the main fan is operational. If not, replace it. workstation
unexpected Refer to Chapter 4 for the FRU Part Number.
shutdown and turn
off of the
workstation.
Shutdown: - Cannot shutdown. workstation

workstation hangs. Keep the power switch depressed for more than 5 seconds.
Database: some - Resend corrupted images. - Network

(all) images are - Spread images transfer over time.
corrupted. - Check that the image(s) from Image source are OK - Image source
- Make sure that the image source send Dicom3 compatible - DCserver (dicom)
images
- Check for the following message in ~sdc/logfiles/db*log: - DBMS
“stored procedure fails –XXX execute failed for procedure verify
image”.
If this message appears, it means that the database structure has
been damaged. The database must be rebuilt, and some images
may be lost.
- Run the Recover Database utility from the User Interface or

"Root menu", or open a console window and type:
cd /export/home/sdc/scripts <Enter>
./sdcapp.csh –k <Enter>
wait for all processes to die

cd /export/home/sdc/scripts <Enter>
./reinstall.images.call <Enter>
Confirm and enter root password when requested.
This can take up to several hours depending on the number of
images stored on the disks.
Quit the AW browser, then login again as sdc.
- Additionally, you can check the hardware (image hard disks).

Launch the HP Diagnostics Tool from the CDrom. See Job Card
TSG005
Database: some - Resend corrupted images. - Network

(all) images are - Spread images transfer over time.
corrupted or cannot - Check that the image(s) from Image source are OK - Image source
be displayed. - Make sure that the image source send Dicom3 compatible - DCserver (dicom)
images
- Select Refresh Lists in Application menu.
- Reboot workstation and restart AW browser.
- Run ”Recover database” from the Service Tools submenu within
the Root menu when logged in as sdc
- Check hardware (image hard disks). Launch the HP Diagnostics
from the CDrom

Database: Images - Check for available image disk space. If no space left, remove - Image Filesystem
were sent OK, but some images from AW.
never seemed to - Refresh the Patient’s list (Browser) - AW browser
arrive. - Restart AW
- Check that the image(s) from Image source are OK - DCserver (dicom)
- Make sure that the image source send Dicom3 compatible
images
- Resend images from the image source
- Reboot workstation and restart AW browser.
- Run ”Recover database” from the Service Tools submenu within
the Root menu when logged in as sdc
Networking: Not - Check that the workstation is up, and that AW software is AW Viewer /
possible to send running correctly and ready to receive images. applications
images to the AW - Run /bin/ping –c 1 <AW_IP_address> from the image source
from the Image console, then ping image source IP address from the Advantage Network
source. Images do Workstation. ~sdc/Prefs/
not seem to arrive - Check Ethernet cables on both sides (image source and AW), - - SdCRHosts
and/or are not Check network modules on Image source. - connectivity
declared into the - Make sure that the ethernet cable is connected to the additional
Database. Ethernet card (in the PCI slot). This is eth0 by default. The
Ethernet connection on the Mother board will default to eth1,and is
reserved for the "Direct connect" option.
- Check that Advantage workstation has not been given an IP

address already used by another host. See /var/log/messages or Network
reboot workstation and check bootup messages. Hosts declaration
- Check that Advantage workstation is properly declared on image

source; check network status (not “suspended”) after you have ~sdc/Prefs/
pushed the images. SdCRHosts
Check internet addresses on both sources and destination.
- Check that Protocol is set to Dicom3 and that Port numbers are
set to the right value (e.g.: AW=4006 Dicom protocol
- Check the logfiles (~sdc/logfiles) for error messages.

netslog ; dcslog ;
Note : images are transferred to the Database, and appear briefly
in the following directory : /export/home1/sdc_image_pool/import/ Dicom
reserved/Process_name/ Conformance
If then images do not show up into the patient list, they are Statement
probably not Dicom3 compatible images.
A pop up message will mention that they are rejected.

Networking: Network controller cards used on the HP XW8400 and XW8600 Auto-negotiation
Networking workstations, are designed and set to fully support the Auto–
performances are negotiation mode.
degraded. The Any Network communication (mode, speed) issues, are most
system does not probably due to problems in the configuration or performance of
seem to have auto- the Site’s network.
negotiated the Nevertheless, in case of Network communication issue (10MBps
optimum or half Duplex mode selecting through auto–negotiation), it is
performances for possible to force these communication parameters to the desired
the network. values.
See emergency procedure, Networking chapter, section 3–3
Networking: The PNF firewall is probably set to deny access for any remote Firewall
Remote hosts Hosts else than the ”Trusted Hosts (those declared in AW).
cannot connect to Check PNF permissions.
your AW. Refer to AW IM, Job Card IST003
Temporarily disable the firewall to check if these hosts can
access.
Query/Retrieve: Edit the .dicomrc file and modify the Dicom_list_size value to Change default
You need to modify match your purpose : value to "500" or
the Dicom_list_size cd /export/home/sdc <Enter> any other value
to match your vi .dicomrc <Enter> recommended.
purpose .................
................
setenv DICOM_LIST_SIZE 500
...............
Save and quit :
<Esc> :wq! <Enter>
Query/Retrieve: Edit the .dicomrc file and uncomment the line : Edit the file and
Edit the .dicomrc NO_CFIND_CANCEL to match your purpose : uncomment the line
by removing the #
file and uncomment character.
cd /export/home/sdc <Enter>
the line: vi .dicomrc <Enter>
NO_CFIND_CANC ......................
EL. setenv DICOM_LIST_SIZE 500
For these systems, setenv NO_CFIND_CANCEL
you may disable ......................
the option and let Save and quit :
the query sequence
<Esc> :wq! <Enter>
to timeout.

Applications: - Check if application(s) is properly declared. Display the AW User Interface

Application(s) do Configuration from the User Interface or the Root Menu and check
not start if application is mentioned.
- Check validity of the license key versus the licenseId of your Licensing
workstation (use eLicense or check with the OLC).
- Check whether NIC ethernet card has changed (new license
keys needed)
- If application seems to be properly installed, you may uninstall it Applications
then reinstall it. Select "uninstallation" button on top right of the
Easy Install window, or run the ~sdc/install/
uninstall.<appli_name> script (see AW IM, Job Card IST005,
section 5 for more details).
Applications: Use the Compatibility Checker tool from the CSD Service Tools / Applications
Applications may Utilities / Advanced Service Tools menu, to make sure the
not be up to date. Applications installed on your AW are up to date. Refer to Job
Card PM004
Viewer: - Check whether ”/” or ”/export/home” partitions are full. File system
Viewer starts • See the Partitions section of the System Health Page
loading of images (Admin.\Service Tools)
displaying XX% • Or at the command prompt, type:
then stops. df –k <Enter>.
If any of these 2 filesystems displays 100% or more, proceed to
”core file” and/or ”log files” cleaning.
Data export: install.http script opens port 8080 for DataExport. - PNF firewall
PNF firewall on: However, this setting can be accidentally removed in the PNF - install.http script
AW is not configuration User Interface. This makes DataExport unreachable
reachable from
other hosts with from other stations.
http. In this case, run again the install.http script to reopen
port 8080. See also Job Card TSG006 for Network
Troubleshooting details.
Printing: - Check that the printer is ready. Printer

Impossible to send See LED or display status. refer to the Vendor’s service manual,
films to the Network and check that printing from another Host is possible.
printer. - Check that Dicom or Postscript printer responds to ping Printer / network
command.
- Check the Dicom or Postscript Printer declaration (see Job card AW application
IST003).
- Reload Application software.
(Load From Warm: see AW IM, Job Card IST010).
- Reload Os and AW core software. OS + AW core
(Load From Cold: see AW IM, Job card IST011).
(see Chapter 5 for more information on Filming option).

Dicom Printing: You may wish to set the Dicom print priority to medium or to high Dicom print
Too long time to get for your AW.
the films printed in
a busy radiology Edit the xx.dev file corresponding to your concerned printer and
department. set the priority to MED or HIGH:
cd /export/home/sdc/Prefs <Enter>
AW default Dicom ls –l *.dev <Enter>
Print priority is set Check the exact ”xx.dev” name of the dicom printer
to low. vi xx.dev <Enter> (where xx is the name corresponding to your
printer)
.................
set printPriority ” ” <<< enter priority here between quotes ”MED”
or ”HIGH”
set printPriority ”MED”
............
Save and quit :
<Esc> :wq! <Enter>
Firefox browser: In certain cases, the Firefox browser (used by Service Tools -
"Unwanted" tabs "Service Desktop UNIX machine" tab) displays additional,
display "unwanted" tabs, such as "Restore Session", "Data Export", or
duplicate "Service Desktop UNIX machine" tabs. This is caused
when an instance of Firefox is closed by clicking in the upper right-
hand corner, or when AW software is closed before closing
Firefox.
This issue can be resolved by manually closing all "unwanted
tabs", then closing Firefox using the File \ Quit option. If a
message prompts you to save tabs for the next session, select the
"Quit" button. The next time you run the Service Tools, you should
see a single "Service Desktop UNIX machine" tab.
Firefox browser: Some Service Tool features operate in "pop-up" windows of the
"pop-ups" blocked Firefox internet browser. If Firefox is configured to block these, the
feature will not work. (For example, Configuration \ Print current
AW parameters displays the workstation’s configuration in a pop-
up window that you can then send to a connected printer using
Firefox’s File \ Print option.)
If an error message warns you Firefox prevented the site from
opening a pop-up, you can respond by selecting Preferences
button then Allow pop-ups for localhost or specify a list of allowed
sites. You can also configure this feature in Firefox using the Edit \
Preferences, then on the Content tab deselect Block pop-up
windows.

3 PNF firewall settings remote checks

Provided that you can reach the AW remotely, the following are the commands you can use to check or
configure the Firewall.
• Switch User to root

su – root <Enter>
Enter the root password when prompted:
• check the firewall status

/export/home/sdc/scripts/configure.firewall status<Enter>
• check AW trusted network rules

cat /usr/share/gehc_security/pnf/aw_filters/modality.filters <Enter>
• check PNF internal rules (”Apply” needed to see/activate the changes)

cat /usr/share/gehc_security/pnf/aw_filters/dynamic.filters<Enter>
• check active firewall settings

iptables –L <Enter>
If anything goes wrong remotely and you still have access to telnet:
• turn PNF off
export/home/sdc/scripts/configure.firewall off <Enter>
• turn PNF on remotely
/export/home/sdc/scripts/configure.firewall on <Enter>
For customers who want to tune the Firewall parameters host by host and port by port, remove (rename)
the modality.sh default file:
mv /usr/share/gehc_security/pnf/modality.sh /usr/share/gehc_security/pnf/modality.sh.old <Enter>


Job Card TSG003 - Filesystem Checks and Repair - Daily Backup
This Job Card aims to guide you through the recommended Service tasks linked to daily backups, file
system checks and archiving. It also highlights and explains common related problems.
1 Supplies
• None
2 Tools
• Blank Cdrom or erased Rewritable Cdrom
3 Safety Precautions
• None
4 Filesystem checks
4-1 Check Partition Use on System Health Page
See the Partitions section of the System Health Page (Admin.\Service Tools). Use the Refresh
All button if needed.
4-2 Checking for the Filesystem full error
The disk sizes given in this section are only examples. The ”used” sizes of your machine may differ from
those shown below as they are subject to grow depending on:
/export/home1: usage of the partition
/export/cdr ; /export/dvdr: usage of the partition
/tmp: usage of the swap partition
/export/home: Images waiting in the printer queue and option software installed
/export/home/sdc: Optional Application software installed.
/ and /boot: Used for system files.
The ”/proc” Filesystem, not accessible to the user, reflects the table of processes managed by the
system.
4-2-1 Procedure
This is an alternative to using the System Health Page
Login as root or switch user to root:
<station_name> console login : root [Enter]
password : operator [Enter]
Open a Command window and click into it and type in:
df –k [Enter]
Note: Actual values will depend on the workstation model and disk configuration. Here is an example from
the System Health Page of a Z800 workstation:

• Check File or Directory size:

- Use the CSD’s Diagnostics\System\Disk Content option, OR
- At the command prompt, use one of the the following commands:
du –ks <Enter>
du –ks < file_name> <Enter>
i.e.: du –ks /etc/hosts <Enter>
i.e: du –ks /export/home/sdc/logfiles <Enter>
4-3 Other useful commands

• Search file(s) by name
find /< dir_name> –name < file_name> –print <Enter>
i.e.: find / –name core –print <Enter>
(find core file(s))
Note: Do not attempt to remove the core directory located under /export/home/sdc directory.
• Search file(s) by size

find /< dir_name> –size +< value> –print <Enter]>
i.e.: find /export/home/sdc –size +1500 –print <Enter>
(find files bigger than 1500KB)

5 Daily Backup
5-1 Backup
There feature makes daily backups, each day at the same time, of the configuration files including Users
preferences and protocols.
This way, all changes are safeguarded that have occurred in the configuration files and/or customer
preferences, since the AW Configuration cdrom was created during installation, or since the last
periodic maintenance.
- As the backup files (up to 2 backups) are stored into the image disks (/export/home1/daily_backup
directory), they won’t be lost in case of system disk crash, so they can use to create an up to date
"AW Configuration Cdrom", and therefore allow you to reinstall and configure your AW.
- They are under the form:
backup_<date n>_<time >
backup_<date n+1>_<time>
- To create a new up to date AW configuration Cdrom proceed as follows:

• Replace the system hard disk and proceed with the Load From Cold steps as described in the
AW4.6 IM, Job Card IST011 (if applicable after system disk crash).
• From the Root Menu, select AW Administration (or from the AW User Interface if the AW license
key is installed, select Admin / AW Administration) to launch the Administration menu.
• Enter the Administrator’s password (default is administrator).
The Administration window pops up.
MAIN MENU
USERS MANAGEMENT 1
SHARED PROTOCOLS MANAGEMENT 2
EXAM CODES MANAGEMENT 3
CONFIGURATION 4
BACKUP THE WHOLE CONFIG ON CDROM 5
RESTORE THE WHOLE CONFIG FROM CDROM 6
RESTORE THE WHOLE CONFIG FROM CDROM EXCEPT
LICENSE ID DEPENDENT FILES, PASSWORDS, KEYBOARD 7
RESTORE REMOTE HOSTS AND PRINTERS ONLY 8
=============================================================
Enter your choice or <Enter> to display the current menu [?,q] [0] 5
=============================================================
• Type 5 <Enter> to select "Backup the whole config on Cdrom"
BACKUP
from current configuration 51
from older configuration (daily back up) 52
=============================================================
Enter your choice or <Enter> to display the current menu [?,q] [5] 52
=============================================================

• Type 51 <Enter> to backup from current configuration (if your system disk was not crashed and
your current configuration is correct OR
Type 52 <Enter> to backup from an older configuration (if your system disk crashed and your
current configuration is empty or uncomplete.
If you typed 52, you will get a message as in the following example:
Select a previous preference backup file
1: backup date: 20090401 time: 121202
2: backup date: 20090402 time: 121201
============================================================
Enter your choice [?,q] [2]
• Select the preferred "day_n" (press 2) or "day_n -1" (press 1) backup file
• Insert a blank or erased rewritable Cdrom into the drive then press <Enter>
The AW configuration parameters and Users preferences are saved on the Cdrom.
5-2 Restore the AW Configuration

Once your new AW Configuration Cdrom is ready, you may restore the configuration, using the
Administration menu (see Section 5-1), choice 6 (or 7 or 8).
5-3 Daily_backup time change

This step is informational only.
The Daily_Backup occurs at 12:12, which is a time of the day where the workstation is supposed to be
up. If this time is not convenient for your site, or if you want to disable this feature, follow the steps:
• switch User to root
su - <Enter>
Enter the root password (default is operator)
• Make a backup copy of the current crontab, for eventual rollback if necessary.
crontab -l > crontab.save <Enter>
• Update the "crontab"
crontab -e <Enter>
• Change the time indicated at the start of the line (set by default to 12 12), with the desired backup
time (in 24 hours format - i.e: 9:30 pm is 21 30), or insert a # at the begining of the line if you want
to disable the Daily_Backup feature.
• Save and quit the editor
<Esc> :wq!

6 Filesystem repair
6-1 Foreword
Images files are stored on 2 image disks, half of the image file on one disk, the second half of the image
on the second disk. In case of crash of one of the two image disks, all images will be lost.
In AW VolumeShare 5, all the system files including Applications, stored on the system disk.
System files are no longer stored on the image data disks.
The following procedure explains how to re-create the image filesystem after the replacement of the
defective image disk(s).
6-2 Procedure
This feature has been developed to handle the replacement of one or two of the Image hard disk drive
(which form a "RAID0 array" : /dev/md0 in linux).
/export/home1 is an XFS filesystem, the image data area is /dev/md0 while the "external journal" is on
the system disk (first hdd,) so all of the 3 HDDs are impacted when the 2nd or 3rd HDD is damaged and
replaced.
1. Turn off the workstation and replace the defective(s) image disk referring to instructions given in the
relevant HP workstation Service Manual (see Chapter 2 : Troubleshooting Guide).
Important! The 2 image hard disks must be exactly the same model.
Note: AW4.6 only supports software RAID.
2. When done, reconnect the power cord and cables and switch on the machine.
When the OS starts to boot, it brings up the graphical display and nothing happens for about a minute or
so. After some time, the boot switches back to text mode and checks if all the 3 hard drives are found.
• It will do nothing if it does not find or recognize the 3 hard disks.
• If all the 3 hard drives are found and as the /export/home1 does not exist yet, a warning message
appears:
WARNING: The RAID array is not mounted, it should be!
This script can rebuild and mount it, but all the possibly existing IMAGE data will be lost!
Do you want to REBUILD and REFORMAT the RAID array and LOOSE all image data currently
available on the system ? (y/n)
• Press y <Enter>
The script re-creates the RAID0 array and mounts it, the boot process is continued and the AW login
screen comes.
After login, the workstation is fully usable to receive new images. Only the /export/home1 partition and
the image database were cleared.

7 Log files
The different logfiles used by the AW software are located under the /export/home/sdc/logfiles directory.
Refer to Job Card TSG 009 for more details.
Among the logfiles, the following are particularly useful for FEs:
- browserlog ; browser_nuilog : (AW core software)
- importimagelog : (incoming images)
- filmerlog : (Filming)
- prslog : Printer Server
- imslog : Image server
- reinstall_database.log (database recover)
- netslog : Network
- dcslog : DICOM server log)
- reviewStationlog : VIEWER log
- dbrlog , dbwlog : Read and write into image Database
- cdcomposerlog , cdpreparatorlog, cdrecordlog : CD–RW
-
AW xore software installation logfiles are under the /export/home directory.
i.e : installaw.log (AW software loading)
AW Application installation and error message logfiles are stored in the following locations:
/var/log/messages
/export/home/sdc/logfiles/easyInstallLog
See AW IM, Job Card IST005 for more details
7-1 To read the Log files

more XXlog <Enter> OR
tail XXlog <Enter> to read the 10 last lines of the ”XXlog” file
tail –NN XXlog | more <Enter> to read the NN last lines of the ”XXlog” file.
7-2 To read compressed Log files

zcat XXlog.X.gz [Enter] where X is the compression date or number.
7-3 To write the logfiles on a USB key

• Open a Command window.
• Switch User to root (if logged in as another user):
su – root <Enter>
password : operator <Enter>
• Change to /export/home/root
cd /export/home/root <Enter>
• Mount the USB key
USBMount <Enter>
• Change to the USB key mounting directory

cd /mnt/usbdisk <Enter>]
• Now you can copy any logfiles on the key.
i.e: cp /export/home/sdc/logfiles/dbrlog /mnt/usbdisk <Enter>
• when done, to unmount the USB key before removing it, type:
USBUmount <Enter>
You can now, safely remove your USB key and insert it in one of the USB ports of your Laptop.
Note: To read the logfiles on a PC, rename them with a .txt extention.
8 Internal System and images disks organization

The following list is a non-exhaustive list of the main directories, and a brief description of their contents.
• /boot: Linux Operating System files (not a serviceable part)
• /export/dbsroot: This is used by the PostgreSQL database (not a serviceable part)
• /export/root: Directory used to manage Direct Connect and USB key files.
• /usr - /bin - /etc - /opt - /var - etc ... : system files
• /export/home1/sdc_image_pool:
- ./archive: not used.
- ./appli: not used.
- ./cdr: not used.
- ./compress: not used.
- ./failed_to_reinstall: directory where the images that could not be properly declared to the
Database are stored.
- ./images: Logical paths to the images in the form of patient, exam, series, image (i.e.: /p1/e2/s3/
i5.1) and images.
- ./local_cdrom: not used.
- ./models: directory where 3D models are stored.
- ./network: not used.
- ./new: not used.
- ./reserved: directory managed by the system to reserve space for the processes to run.
• /export/home/sdc:
- ./afm: directory which contains the AW fonts.
- ./AIA: directory which contains various files such as the AnonymousMaker utility
- ./appchecker: directory which contains the Applications Checker files
- ./app–defaults: directory which contains the Application default configuration files
- ./bin - /bin32 - /bin64: directories which contains the binaries used by Application.
- ./catalog_message: directory which contains Application messages.
- ./CD–Viewer: Is the CD–RW directory.
- ./core: directory to prevent creating and storing a ”core” crash file in case of system crash.
- ./database_scripts: directory which contains the database management scripts
- ./denta, vxtl, nav, fctl etc.: These directories are created when installing Dentascan. 3D,
Navigator, FuncTool, etc. Advanced Applications.

- ./doc: Is a directory where all AW and Apps documentation files are stored in PDF format.
- ./DataExport: directory which contains the DataExport application files.
- ./film: This directory is used by Filming.
- ./import: directory where any image is placed before , in order to be integrated into the images
directory.
- ./install: This directory contains all installation and de–installation scripts.
- ./lib - /lib64: directory which contains the libraries used by Application.
- ./license: directory which contains the software licence keys.
- ./licenseServer: directory which contains the binaries to check the licence keys.
- ./logfiles: directory which contains the logfiles generated by Application.
- ./messages: directory which contains other Application messages.
- ./scripts: This directory contains all NON–installation scripts. Among them, you can find the
sdc_conf and sdc_crash scripts, the showdasm, showmod etc... test scripts, the start.sdc and
kill.sdc scripts.
- ./.options: Contains the installed Postscript printers.
- ./plugin: Contains . so system files .
- ./Prefs: Contains the basic Users preferences files or directories, and Site parameters.
It also contains files such as SdCRHosts file where is stored information about Hosts accessible
from AW, Applications preferences (FunctoolPrefs, etc.), files named XXXX.dev , YYYYY.dev, ...
for the Dicom Printers installed, etc.
It also contains the .licenseInst file with all the Applications license keys stored on the
workstation.
- ./psm: directory which contains the Preferences Sharing Manager files.
- ./Users: Contains other Users directories and settings.
- ./UserPrefs: As Prefs for SDC user, it contains the other Users preferences settings.

Job Card TSG004 - Replacing Hard Disks
You should replace a disk that has failed, or whose Smart Health is highlighted in red on the System
Home Page, or that fails disk tests using the HP Diagnostics tool.
1 Supplies
• None.
2 Tools
• None.
• See Chapter 3, section 4.
4 Procedure
Note: 73GB, 146GB or 300GB SAS hard disks SHOULD NOT be reformatted or repartitioned for use with the
AW workstation.
If a disk is defective, order a new disk through the spare parts process. See Chapter 4 for part
references.


Job Card TSG005 - Using HP Diagnostics Tool
You can use the appropriate version of this software to perform field diagnostics on an AW Workstation.
1 Supplies
• HP Vision Diagnostics (supplied for Z800 / VS5 on HP Diagnostics CD, Part No.5393401), or
• HP InSight Diagnostics (previous version of software, previously supplied with XW8600 or XW8400)
• One USB storage device.
Note: The HP Diagnostics products are also available to download from the HP Business Support Center site
at http://h20000.www2.hp.com/bizsupport/
Ensure that you download an .ISO image that you can burn to disk, and that the version you download
is compatible with the workstation hardware and operating system.
2 Tools
• None
• None
4 Procedure
Note: The messages, screens, menus and instructions given below may vary slightly depending on the
actual HP Diagnostics product used (as supplied with the workstation model), and on the
configuration of the workstation, e.g. Save options depend on storage media available.
• Shutdown the workstation

• Insert the HP Diagnostics CD into the drive and switch on the workstation.
Normally the HP Diagnostics program will boot from the Cdrom without intervention.
If you need to configure the workstation to boot from CDrom if present, press F9 at the first HP screen
during reboot.
• For HP Vision Diagnostics, you will be asked to select Vision Diagnostics or HP Memory Tests
(choose the former).
• For Insight Diagnostics, the following messages should display
ISOLINUX X.XX ...............
Loading HP Insight Diagnostics CD. Please wait
boot: ....
Loading: ...
......................
Ready

Loading drivers ...done

Press the ”y” key to use safe mode ........
It may take several minutes before the HP Diagnostics login screen displays.
You will be asked to select the interface language, and to confirm the license agreement, for instance:
You may also be asked to select the keyboard language and layout (normally leave the default Generic
101–key PC keyboard selected).
• Click on Continue.
The End User License Agreement window displays.
• Click on Agree to continue.
A status message confirms that the program is loading. This may take several minutes. (Vision
Diagnostics loads in a Windows shell).
The software performs an initial System Survey which will take a few moments more.
The main Diagnostics window displays:

The Survey window allows you to check all the detected hardware components.
Dragging the scroll bar allows viewing the PCI slots.
If you have already inserted a USB key in one of the USB ports, it will be detected too.
• Click on (1) About. The name of the release displays in a pop–up window.
Click on OK to close the Release window
You may also choose to save the configuration (called survey) on a USB storage device.
Note: To save to a USB device, plug it into a USB port before clicking Save, so that it is recognized by the
system.
Click on the Save (2) button if you want to save the survey.
The Save window pops up.
Click on the Save to USB key check box,
Note: If the USB key entry does not show in the menu, click on the Cancel button and navigate between
Survey, Test, and back to Survey to refresh the screen, then select Save again.
Keep the default ”survey.html’ name or type in the name you want to give to the test file (i.e:
xw8400survey.txt) in the File Name window.
Now click on the Test (3) tab. The Diagnostic Test window displays.

In the example, we have kept the Quick Test selected and the Unattended mode
You can choose to test all the workstation’s hardware devices, or only some of them, and the number
of times you want to run the test (number of loops).
In this mode, you will also be prompted to press on any of the keys of the keyboard, and
there will be several passes of move and clicks test of the mouse.
• Select ”All devices” or choose the single device(s) you want to test.
• Select a number of loops (1 by default), or the number of times you want to run the test.
You may instead choose to run the test during a certain laps of time.
You may choose to end the test on first error.
• Click on the Begin Testing .
The Test Status window displays.

In the example below, we chose to run the Quick Test selected in the Unattended mode

• Click on the Cancel Testing , if you want to modify some of the testing parameters.
When the test is over, the Cancel Testing button changes to Retest.
You may wish to restart the same test by clicking on the Retest button.
If you want to change the test parameters, get back to the Test window (click on Test tab) and modify
the parameters, then click on the Begin Testing button to restart.
Once the test are done, you can check what has been logged, by clicking on the Log tab.
All reported errors will be displayed in the Error Log .

• Navigate between Text Log window and Error Log window. Test Log shows the status of the test that
have been run, while Error Log gives additional details on test that have failed.
• Insert your USB key in any of the USB ports.
• Click on the Save button.
The Save window pops up.
• Click on the Save to USB key check box.

Keep the default ”Testlog.html’ name or type in the name you want to give to the test file (i.e:
xw8400test.txt) in the File Name window.
Click on Exit to quit the Diagnostics program.
A warning message displays.

• Click on OK to exit the Diagnostics Utility.

The workstation starts to shutdown and reboot.
• Extract the USB key.
• Eject the HP Diagnostics CD from the DVD/CD drive, to avoid the workstation starting to reboot from
the CD.


Job Card TSG006 - Solving Network Problems
This Job Card aims to explain the tools and procedures that you can use to diagnose and solve network-
related issues.
• None
2 Monitoring commands
• Login as root or switch user to root ( su - root)
Note: Internet numbers in the text are used for example ONLY. Use numbers for your specific network.
• Ping: connection test
ping X.X.X.X <Enter> (internet address)
i.e: ping 3.45.13.110 <Enter> (internet address)
PING 3.45.13.110 (3.45.13.110) from 3.249.12.127 : 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=761 usec
64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=3 ttl=255 time=1.286 msec
.............................................................
• Interrupt by pressing <Ctrl> <C> when desired
--- 3.45.13.110 ping statistics ---
X packets transmitted, X packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max/mdev = 0.394/0.823/5.416/0.980 ms
• Telnet: open a session on remote machine
(e.g.: get the date from OC console through the network – Job id = 13)
telnet 192.9.200.1 13 <Enter>
Trying 192.9.200.1
Connected to mr01-oc0
Escape character is ’^]’.
Date -----------
Connection closed by foreign host
Note: A large percentage of dropped packages is not significant of network problems. It can be due to a
heavy activity of the network or the workstation that you ”spray”.
Note: Hosts are not updated in the /etc/inet/hosts file but can be found in the /export/home/sdc/Prefs/
SdCRHosts file. For this reason, it is not possible to use “ping”, “telnet”, and similar commands using
the hostname. The internet address must be used instead. For example, to ping the MR operator’s

console from the Advantage workstation, do not use ping MR01_OC0. Instead, use /usr/bin/ping
192.9.200.1 <Enter>.
Note: In case of images transfer problem during query / retrieve from AW to a remote host when selecting
”patient transfer”, (the transfer failed with error message related to the host declaration) and
successful transfer when selecting ”series transfer”, check the provider type screen, in Network
Manager. (refer to AW IM, IST002).
• Arp command: current internet–to–ethernet address translation of connected machines:

arp –a <Enter>
Address . HWtype HWaddress Flags Mask Iface
3.45.13.110 ether 08:00:20:C6:FC:7E C eth0
3.249.15.254 ether 00:00:5E:00:01:03 C eth0
• Ifconfig: get internet (inet) address, netmask value, broadcast:
ifconfig eth0 <Enter>
eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:E0:81:00:4A:2B
inet addr:3.249.12.127 Bcast:3.249.15.255 Mask:255.255.252.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:51095 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:191 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:7766887 (7.4 Mb) TX bytes:15189 (14.8 Kb)
Interrupt:21 Base address:0xa000
ifconfig –a <Enter>
provides information on other ethernet controllers if applicable:
The additional ethernet board (NIC) defaults to eth0 (main ethernet), and the Ethernet controller on the Mother
board is set to eth1 (reserved for ”Direct Connect” option through additional network).
Refer to the Network section of the System Health Page (Admin.\Service Tools) for status of the workstation’s
ethernet controllers.
3 Using HP Diagnostics Tool

Using the HP Vision / InSight Diagnostics software (downloadable, or as provided on CD-ROM with the
workstation) can help identify hardware problems, for instance with the NIC Ethernet card. Refer to Job
Card TSG005 for details.
4 HTTP Server Support
The following AW4.6 features require the workstation to have HTTP Server support (enabled by default),
and on having the 8080 port open:
DataExport, Application Usage Monitor, and Preferences Sharing Manager (PSM).

By default the HTTP Server process is enabled when AW4.6 is installed. However process conflicts or
other errors may cause it to fail. In such cases, the above features will not work correctly. The 8080 port
may also be accidentally or manually closed via the PNF Firewall.
Thus if problems occur with the above features, you should check whether the HTTP Server is running,
and check whether the 8080 port is open. Symptoms may include a "Page not available HTTP 404 error"
displaying in Firefox.
For further details, see the AW IM, Job Card IST002, section HTTP support option.


Job Card TSG007 - Using a USB Memory Device for Service
You will often find it convenient to use a USB memory device to carry out Service-related tasks. This Job
Card explains how and when to do this.
1 Supplies
• FE laptop
• A USB memory stick
2 Tools
• None
• None
4 Procedure
• Connect your USB memory stick to one of the free USB ports of the workstation.
You do not need to turn off the workstation.
Illustration 1 HP Z800 Workstation - USB port locations

Illustration 2 HP XW8600 / 8400 Workstation - USB port locations
• Open a Command Window and switch user to root:

su – root <Enter>
Enter the root password when prompted
• Change to /export/home/root
• Mount the USB memory stick
USBMount <Enter>
• Change to the USB key mounting directory
cd /mnt/usbdisk <Enter>
Now you can work on your USB key like with any mounted filesytem, and use Linux commands like cp,
ls, rm, mkdir , cd etc., to copy image files, logfiles, anything you may want to export onto your Laptop.
i.e: cp /export/home/sdc/logfiles/* /mnt/usbdisk <Enter>
• When done, to unmount the USB memory stick before removing it, type:
USBUmount <Enter>
You can now, safely remove your USB memory stick and insert it in one of the USB ports of your Laptop.

Job Card TSG008 - NEC LCD 1980SXi/1990SXI - Common Issues
1 Supplies
• None
2 Tools
• None
• None
4 Procedure
4-1 Introduction
When NEC 1980SXi/1990SXi LCD monitor is switched to ON position, it automatically detects video
input, format and resolution. However, in some rare cases video issues may occur. To correct this,
perform the procedures given below.
These procedures use the LCD Monitor Set-Up buttons as shown below:
Illustration 1 NEC Landscape LCD Monitor Set-Up Buttons
NEC 1980SXI/ 1990SXI

LCD monitor
tsg008.fm Page no. 91

4-2 First Installation Issue

Sometime, during a first installation, when site data’s are required (e.g. hostname, IP address, net mask), user
might get error message such as bad hostname.
This issue is caused by a low monitor resolution setting. All character lines are not displayed on the monitor
panel.
Solution:
Perform a monitor FACTORY PRESET when the problem occurs to configure the right monitor resolution:
• Press Exit button to display OSD.
• Press > button 5 times to move to 2nd tool box tag.

• Press Select 1-2 button to enter 2nd tool box menu.
• Press > button 8 times to move to the factory settings icon.
• Press Select 1-2 button to enter to the factory settings window.
• Press Reset button to recover monitor factory settings.
• Press Exit button twice to exit and remove OSD.
4-3 Automatic Auto–Adjust Parameter Issue

By default, the NEC LCD 1980SXi monitor is configured with the auto–adjust function enable. This allows
monitor to automatically detect the image size after the Screen Saver is releasing and initiates the screen
display. This can causes some image size issues on application.
Solution:
The auto–adjust parameter must be set to disabled.
Pre–Requisite: The workstation is running an AW4.6 application.

• The screen: displays the Patient list to detect the 1280x1024 format.
You can use the SMPTE test patterns for performing this adjustment.
• Detect the image resolution (format) by pressing alternatively on the Select 1–2 button, and the Exit
button. Note that at the first time the system is powered up, the image can be shifted to the left or
right, or out of the screen limits.
• When the image has the right format, turn OFF the monitor.
• Turn ON the monitor, while keeping the Select 1–2 button pressed:
The Maintenance menu pops up. You can now release the Select1–2 button.
• Press twice the > button, and move to Tab 3 (auto–adjust).Your monitor is most probably set to single
or to full.
Press the Select 1–2 button.
• With the + and/or – buttons, move auto-adjust to OFF.
• Press the Exit button.
• Press again the Exit button to quit the Monitor adjustment menu.
• Switch OFF and ON the monitor.
Page no. 92 tsg008.fm

4-4 Blank Screen Issue

4-4-1 HP Z800 / xw8400/8600 workstation connected with a DVI to VGA adapter cable
Note: This configuration is not the standard configuration and should not be seen on standard AW sites.
However, Vascular sites using a VGA video splitter may be impacted.
By default, the DVI input of your NEC monitor might be configured to Auto or Digital causing a blank
screen issue at first installation.The video input must be set to Analog.
Solution:
The following must be done. The monitor must be connected and have an active video signal at its input (the
LED is green).
• Turn OFF the monitor
• Press the Select 1/2 button and turn ON the monitor.
• Keep the Select 1/2 button depressed for at least 2 seconds, then release the button.
The monitor turns on and displays the Maintenance menu.
• Press 6 times the > button to reach Tab 7.
When Tab 7 is highlighted, confirm by pressing on Select 1/2 button.
• Press 3 times the > button to reach DVI selection.
• Press the + or – button to change from Auto or Digital to Analog.
• Press the < button to go to Video Detect.
• Press the + or – button to change to none (do not want first or last detect selected).
• Press twice on the Exit button to save and quit the Maintenance menu.
• Switch OFF and ON the monitor.
4-4-2 HP xw8600/8400 workstations delivered with a DVI to DVI video cable

For these workstations, keep the DVI Digital factory default setting.
tsg008.fm Page no. 93

Page no. 94 tsg008.fm

Job Card TSG009 - Using System Logfiles
This Job Card aims to explain the AW workstation’s system logfiles. (For details of Application logfiles,
see the AW IM, Job Cards IST005 and IST010.)
• None
2 Logfile information
2-1 Installation logfiles
Installation Logfiles can be found under /export/home directory.
• Change to the logfiles directory and list contents:
cd /export/home <Enter>
ls –la <Enter>
- preinstall.log:
This logfile gives information prior to the launch of install.aw, from the GEHC_Linux OS
post–installation script.
- install.log:
These logfiles gives the logfiles about actions prior to a new LFC.
2-2 Logfile List
Note: Starting from the AW4.2_04 release, the logfile increment convention is slightly modified.
i.e:
• Prior to AW4.2_04 : dbrlog.date.Z where date = FriSep615:15:04 for example
• From AW4.2_04 : dbrlog.n.gz where 1<n<10
AW4.6 uses the second method, as explained later in this chapter.
Most logfiles can be found under /export/home/sdc/logfiles directory, and/or accessed directly through the
Maintenance menu.
• Change to the main logfiles directory and list contents:
cd /export/home/sdc/logfiles <Enter>
ls –la <Enter>
Note: The following list is not exhaustive and lists logfiles for the key system processes.
- AimGatewaylog: Dedicated to log space reservations made by the Print Manager to AIM. (For AW
Engineering use only).
- anonymousmakerlog: Dedicated to log actions when anonymizing exams under an alias patient
name (this is mostly used for demos, or when sending Patient’s file to OLCs or Engineering, where
the patient’s name must not appear for confidentiality reasons).
- appmanagementlog: Dedicated to log declarations of applications.

- awalog: Dedicated to log actions on the Control panel of the Viewer.

- awccowlog: Logfiles of the CCOW context enabler (AW side)
- awauditslog: Dedicated to the ’audit’ log files.
- browser_nuilog: Dedicated to log actions on the Control panel of the Browser.
- browserlog: Dedicated to log actions on the Viewer.
- cdcomposerlog: Dedicated to log actions on the CD composer.
- cdpreparatorlog: Dedicated to log actions on the CD burning process preparator
- cdrecordlog: Dedicated to log actions on the CD burning process.
- clamscan.log: Logfile for the ClamAV antivirus package (if you have configured it according to the
Actvation Procedure in Job Card TSG013.
- dbrlog: Database Read logfiles.
- dbwlog: Database Write logfiles.
- dclimg: Mini Viewer log
- dcslog: Dedicated to log data transfers in Dicom protocol.
- dcspush.log: Dicom push logfiles.
- dentacamera.logs: Dentascan print logfiles.
- dicomPrintlog: Dicom print logfiles.
- directConnectLog: Direct Connect option logfile
- dmslog: Logfiles for the Dicom CD–R.
- filmComposerProxylog: Dedicated to log the requests made by older Advanced Applications which
previously used the Film Composer, or the Scrapbook.
- hostmanagementlog: Dedicated to log the process of new Hosts declaration.
- importimagelog: Dedicated to log the process to import the images into the Database.
- imslog: Dedicated to log the process to declare the images into the Database.
- inst_startlog: Installation logfiles.
- installog: Installation logfiles.
- lcbuildlog: Logfiles for Printing through Advanced Applications (Batch Filming for V.A.).
- logoutlog: Dedicated to log the logouts actions.
- lpNetlog: Unix Logfiles for Postscript printing.
- lpschedlog: Logfiles of the Unix Line printer demon for Postscript printing.
- miniviewerlog: Logfiles of the Mini Viewer.
- mosaicDisplaylog: Logfiles of the Mosaic display.
- netlog: Network server log. All internal processes transit through the Netserver.
- pfEnginelog: Contains logs from the pfEngine background process, which
-processes the different events generated by the patient list, or the database, or CCOW or the
Postfetch UI, and
-sends requests towards the database or towards the DICOM archive station
- pfFrontendlog: Contains logs from pfFrontend process which provides the bridge between the user
and pfEngine. (e.g. pfFrontend shows pop-ups if required)
- printManagerlog: Dedicated to log printers configurations and film generation.
- problemreportterlog: Logs related to the Problem Report feature. See section 4 Checking Logfiles
Collected by Problem Report
- prslog: Actual Print server logfiles.
- queueManagementlog: Dedicated to log the Netwok and Media queues.

- reinstall_database.log: Database reinstallation logfiles.

- reviewStationlog: Logfiles of the Viewer.
- sbooklog: Scrapbook logfiles.
- sessionrecorderlog: Logfile for the Session Recorder tool.
- sdcapplog: Dedicated to log start and stop of application.
- softswitchlog: Logfile of the Softswitch feature (AW and RIS synchronization)
- swddlog and swdilog: Logfiles of the Software Download (SWD) feature
- userlog: Lists user login times and dates.
Note: Some logfiles may not be present, or may be empty if the corresponding service has not been installed
or used.
Some additional, user-defined logfiles may be present, and if so they should be checked.
For example, if the clamAV antivirus tool has been configured, the specified logfile should be
checked for potential security issues. See Job Card TSG013 for further details. If a virus is
identifed by a scan, refer to the clamAV documentation or the OLC.
EA3 logfiles are under /var/log directory:
- ea3_audit.log: EA3 authentication server logfile
- ea3_syslog.log: EA3 authentication server logfile
PNF logfiles are under /var/log directory into messages.x files:
To read current PNF logs:
cat messages | grep PNF <Enter> or
cat messages | grep PNF:NET <Enter> (to simply view dropped connections)
PNF logs are very verbose. To read other currentlogs (other than PNF) in messages :
cat messages | grep –v PNF <Enter>
To read compressed PNF logs:
zcat messages.x.gz | grep PNF <Enter> or
cat messages.x.gz | grep PNF:NET <Enter> (where x = compression date)
2-3 Reading Logfiles

Use either the more command if you want to read page by page the whole contents of the file, or
the tail command, (or tail –n , n being the number of lines you want to read), to see the most recent
messages logged. See example below:
more netslog <Enter> or
tail dbrlog <Enter> (last 10 lines) or
tail –n browserlog <Enter> (last n lines)
Note: Logfiles are periodically ”cleaned”. It means that as soon as they grow up over a certain size, they are
automatically compressed.
So you will also see compressed files of the form:
- dbrlog.n.gz where 1<n<10
These compressed files are erased after 10 occurences
To read a file, uncompress it first then read using more or tail commands as shown before:

gunzip XXlog.n.gz <Enter>

e.g.: gunzip dbrlog.6.gz <Enter>
more XXlog.n <Enter>
e.g.: more dbrlog.6 <Enter>
3 Using the SDC_CRASH utility

There is an utility under /export/home/sdc/scripts named sdc_crash. This script is an automated process to
collect all System logfiles, and dump them into a compressed file that can be transferred through InSite to the
Support Center, or copied to a USB device, or uncompressed to be locally analysed. To execute it from the
command line:
• Switch User to root
su – root <Enter>
Enter root password when prompted
• Build the crashlog file
/export/home/sdc/scripts/sdc_crash <Enter>
sdc_crash
Saving logfiles and Prefs...
Saving system information...
.....................
The file /tmp/AW_4_6_<Version>_<hostname>_<Date>.crash.tar.gz is ready
If you wish to send, this file to your Support Center using a USB key, refer to Job Card TSG007.
If you wish to analyze yourself this crash file, you can do the following:
• Uncompress and untar the xxx.crash.tar.gz file and proceed to default analyze...
gunzip AW_4_5_<Version>_<hostname>_<Date>.crash.tar.gz <Enter>
tar xvf AW_4_5_<Version>_<hostname>_<Date>.crash.tar <Enter>
i.e :
x ./browserlog.SunMay715:15:02.Z, 1547 bytes, 4 tape blocks
..................................................
x ./dcslog.FriMay520:15:03.Z, 1120 bytes, 3 tape blocks
....................................................................
• List the contents of the available logfiles:
ls <Enter>
....................
dbrlog.SatMay615:15:03.Z
......................
• Read the logfile(s):
i.e.:
more dbrlog <Enter> or
zcat dbrlog.date.Z <Enter> (if file si compressed)
4 Checking Logfiles Collected by Problem Report

Note: This function is not activated if InSite has not been configured on AW. (No checkout done).

The Problem Report feature automatically collects data related to system process errors / application
crashes.
If an Application (new or legacy) crashes, this is detected by the AW browser. Problem Report then
copies the most recent logfiles:
from /export/home/sdc/logfiles
to /export/home1/sdc_image_pool/ProblemReport.
• When InSite is connected, this data is automatically sent to the GE Back Office’s global server. The
report file name contains the workstation model type, system ID and the date.
(This export is transparent to the user and no FE intervention is necessary.)
• However if you are called to a site because of an application-related problem, you should try to obtain
the Problem Report logfiles from the affected workstation(s). Check the following locations:
/export/home1/sdc_image_pool/ProblemReport/ this will contain the report file

/export/home1/sdc_image_pool/ProblemReport/image/image.zip will contain the image set selected
by the user during crash.
- Only 6 images from each series selected are collected.
- As these images are not anonymized, make sure you use the Anonymous Maker utility to
anonymize these images before taking/sending this data off-site. Refer to Job Card IST011,
section 3-7 Anonymous Maker tool.
If Insite is configured on the System, but the GE Back Office cannot be reached, the logfiles remain
in the ProblemReport directory for 7 days. The ProblemReport directory is cleaned every 7 days.
After 7 days, the original Problem Report logfiles may remain in /export/home/sdc/logfiles
directory.
See also the AW IM, Job Card IST005, section 9 for further details of Troubleshooting for
Applications.


Job Card TSG010 - Information about Running Processes
1 Processes and brief explanation

The first processes listed below are started when booting–up, and belong to Root. There is not much you
can do with them. They must be up and running before the AW software can be started successfully.
If this is not the case, shutdown the workstation and boot it again.
• To list all the active processes, run the following command:
ps –ef | more <Enter>
Note: The following is an example, and may differ from what you get on the screen.
UID PID PPID C STIME TTY TIME CMD
root 1 0 0 05:27 ? 00:00:01 init [5]
root 2 1 0 05:27 ? 00:00:00 [migration/0]
root 3 1 0 05:27 ? 00:00:00 [ksoftirqd/0]
root 4 1 0 05:27 ? 00:00:00 [migration/1]
root 5 1 0 05:27 ? 00:00:00 [ksoftirqd/1]
root 6 1 0 05:27 ? 00:00:00 [events/0]
root 7 1 0 05:27 ? 00:00:00 [events/1]
root 8 6 0 05:27 ? 00:00:00 [khelper]
root 9 6 0 05:27 ? 00:00:00 [kacpid]
root 42 6 0 05:27 ? 00:00:00 [kblockd/0]
root 43 6 0 05:27 ? 00:00:00 [kblockd/1]
..........................................................
rpc 2220 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 portmap
rpcuser 2240 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 rpc.statd
root 2332 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 /usr/sbin/acpid
root 2406 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 cupsd
..........................................................
root 2636 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 [rpciod]
root 2640 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 rpc.mountd
root 2660 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 rpc.idmapd
root 2676 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 /usr/sbin/vsftpd /etc/vsftpd/vsftpd.conf
Then Insite and EA3 servers are started
root 2726 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 /export/home1/insite/server/bin/iip–httpd –f
/export/home1/insite/server/conf/httpd.conf
nobody 2759 2726 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 /export/home1/insite/server/bin/iip–httpd –f
/export/home1/insite/server/conf/httpd.conf
............................................
tomcat 2792 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:05 /usr/sbin/tomcat
–Dcom.redhat.tomcat.sysconf=/etc/sysconfig/tomcat –home /usr/share/tom
cat –logfile /usr/share/tomcat/logs/tomcat.out –pidfile /var/run/tomcat/tomcat.pid –user tomcat
root 2821 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 ./ea3_srv –server

.......................................
postgres 2999 2993 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 postgres: stats buffer process
postgres 3000 2999 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 postgres: stats collector process
root 3294 1 0 05:28 ? 00:00:00 /usr/sbin/mlocker 1826
root 3626 1 0 05:28 tty1 00:00:00 /sbin/mingetty tty1
....................................
When Application is started, you can see that most of the next processes belong to sdc.
sdc 3827 3792 0 05:29 ? 00:00:00 –/bin/csh –c /usr/bin/ssh–agent
/export/home/sdc/.xsession
sdc 3879 3827 0 05:29 ? 00:00:00 /bin/sh /export/home/sdc/.xsession
sdc 3880 3879 0 05:29 ? 00:00:00 /usr/bin/ssh–agent /export/home/sdc/.xsession
sdc 3889 3879 0 05:29 ? 00:00:00 colorReaper
sdc 3920 1 0 05:29 ? 00:00:00 xterm –fb helvetica –fn 7x13bold –title CONSOLE –C –j
–sb –sl 900 –n CONSOLE –name cxte
rm –fg #ffc000 –bg Grey20 –bd #ffc000 –cr #ffc000 –b 4 –iconic
sdc 3987 3879 0 05:29 ? 00:00:00 mwm
sdc 3996 3920 0 05:29 pts/0 00:00:00 –sh
sdc 6143 1 0 09:56 ? 00:00:00 /bin/csh /export/home/sdc/scripts/xtermSdC –cr #ffc000 –T
Terminal –geometry 80x30
sdc 6169 6143 0 09:56 ? 00:00:00 xterm –ie –sb –fb helvetica –fn 7x13bold –title Terminal
–cr #ffc000 –geometry 80x30
sdc 6171 6169 0 09:56 pts/1 00:00:00 –sh
Then the AW servers are started
sdc 6798 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 netserver (network server)
sdc 6800 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 dbrserver (database read server)
sdc 6802 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 dbwserver (database write server)
sdc 6804 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 imserver (image management server)
sdc 6806 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 dcserver (Dicom server)
sdc 6808 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 prserver (Print server)
root 6810 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 dmserver (Dicom Media server)
................................
sdc 6859 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 printManager
sdc 6861 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 browser_nui
sdc 6863 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 CdComposer
sdc 6865 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 CdPreparator
sdc 6867 1 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 xautolock –time 5 –locker xlockSdC.csh
postgres 6998 2993 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 postgres: postgres ctmr_sdc_db [local] idle
sdc 7001 6859 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 /export/home/sdc/bin/printManagerSlave
sdc 7004 6808 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 prserver
sdc 7012 6800 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 dbrserver
sdc 7014 6804 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 imserver

sdc 7015 6802 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 dbwserver

sdc 7018 6818 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 /export/home/sdc/bin/filmer_nui
sdc 7023 6818 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 mosaicDisplay –iconic –parent 16777937
sdc 7126 7018 0 10:03 ? 00:00:00 /export/home/sdc/bin/filmComposerProxy
Processes consequent to a remote login on the workstation can be running also, as shown below.
root 25609 712 0 16:27 ? 00:00:00 in.telnetd: 3.45.13.110
root 25610 25609 0 16:27 ? 00:00:00 login –– sdc
sdc 25611 25610 0 16:27 pts/2 00:00:00 –csh
Result of the ps –ef | more command starts the following processes :
sdc 25643 25611 0 16:28 pts/2 00:00:00 ps –ef
sdc 25644 25611 0 16:28 pts/2 00:00:00 more
Note: The status of the following key software subsystem processes is also shown in the Subsystem Status
section of the System Health Page (Admin.\Service Tools):
• postgresql (database server)
• prserver (print server)
• dcserver (DICOM server)
2 Restartable processes
2-1 Restarting the BROWSER
You can either restart BROWSER from the ROOT MENU or by opening a Command Window and typing:
• cd /export/home/sdc/scripts <Enter>
• sdcapp.csh –k <Enter>
• restart_sdc.csh <Enter>
2-2 Application Hung

Remote log in from another workstation or a Unix / Linux image source:
• telnet <IP address of the hung workstation> <Enter>
i.e: telnet 192.25.33.1 <Enter>
User : sdc <Enter>
Password : adw4.5 <Enter>
• cd export/home/sdc/scripts<Enter>
• ./sdcapp.csh –k <Enter>
• restart_sdc.csh <Enter>
If the processes cannot be restarted, shutdown and reboot the workstation :

• init 6 <Enter>
Then restart application by login in as sdc on the workstation.

3 Root menu scripts

In addition to the standard Linux commands that can be run from a Command Window on the AW
workstation, a collection of scripts is provided to support common service tasks. The actual scripts that
can be used depend on the current user. Most scripts are stored in the following directories:
/export/home/sdc/scripts
/export/home/sdc/database_scripts
/export/home/root (scripts in this folder cannot normally be modified).
Note: Some scripts provide convenient ways to run workstation utilities via a remote connection.
To access the Root menu, press simultaneously the <Alt> and <F3> keys.
This will iconify the current windows.
Select Command Window and type in the name of the script you wish to use. Below is a list of some of
the most useful scripts.
Important! Some scripts are retained from previous releases for backwards compatibility only. Others
should be used with caution. Do not attempt to use scripts that are NOT documented in the
Service docs, without first consulting the OLC.
Script Purpose
admin_menu To access the ”Administration menu”
ccow_conf To check CCOW status of the
workstation.
conf To display workstation configuration data
(as shown on the "AW Configuration"
screen).

Script Purpose
conf > /tmp/config To save workstation configuration data to
a text file called config
configure.firewall To check or change the status of the PNF
firewall.
easyinstall To launch the EasyInstall tool on the
workstation (install Applications from CD
/ Hard disk).
hard_conf To display key workstation hardware
configuration data.
insite.backup To backup InSite configuration.
insite.restore To restore InSite configuration.
insiteBrowser To launch the iLinq interactive Browser.
license_status To check the status of licenses for
available AW Applications.
reinstall.images.call To ”Recover database” locally (root
user). To monitor the progress of
database recovery, you will have to
unlock the screen by typing the "root"
password.
runSessionRecorder.sh To run the Session Recorder tool (sdc
user).
sdc_conf To display installed Applications and their
license keys.
sdc_database.sh rebuild To ”Recover database” remotely through
a "telnet" session (root or sdc_admin
user).
Note: If the database recovery process
was launched locally, and you want to
monitor it remotely from a telnet session,
switch User to "root", then type:
display_recover_progression -f
reinstall_database.log
site_conf To display local site configuration
parameters for the workstation.
softswitch_conf To check Softswitch status of the
workstation.
sys-config To reset the workstation’s hostname, IP
address, netmask.

Script Purpose
sys-reconfig To reboot the workstation and reset the
workstation’s basic site parameters:
hostname, IP address, netmask, time
and date.
start_SMPTE To ”Install SMPTE” patterns.
sdcapp.csh –k To exit AW.
restart_sdc.csh To restart AW.

Job Card TSG011 - Service Tools - Common Service Desktop
1 Overview
The Common Service Desktop provides access to a set of Service Tools for workstation diagnostics and
basic maintenance. This chapter explains the Service Tools that are used for servicing the workstation.
(Features used for setup and configuration are explained in the AW IM, Job Cards IST002 and IST004.)
Important! Only properly qualified and experienced FEs or other technicians should attempt to use these
tools, or to make other changes to the AW Workstation.
2 Accessing the Common Service Desktop

You can access the Common Service Desktop (via the Firefox browser) locally from the workstation, or
remotely via the network, by one of the following methods:
2-1 Locally on the workstation

2-1-1 Access through the User Interface
Select the Service Tools option from the Tools menu
Illustration 1 Tools menu - Service Tools option

2-1-2 Access through the Root menu
You can also get to the Service Tools menu through the Root menu, by:
- pressing simultaneously the <Alt> and <F3> keys to iconify the windows in use
- pressing on the left mouse buttons and select the Service Tools from the Root menu / Service Tools

Illustration 2 Root menu - Service Tools option
When you select this option, the Firefox browser launches. By default this displays the CSD Health
Page, a summary of diagnostic information about the workstation. See section 3-1 Home (System Health
Page) for details.
Note: The first time any user runs Firefox, a message displays, asking whether Firefox should be the default
browser. In this case, users should always accept the Yes option (do not attempt to change browser).
2-2 Remote access from another AW (or another host) on the network
• Start the Firefox browser application.
In the example below, start Firefox from an AW local host on the network

2. Click Mozilla to open

1. Click More to view web browser
available applications
Tip: drag Mozilla to the
Apps window to make it
available directly
Illustration 3 Software Manager browser option
The Firefox browser starts.

• Enter the remote AW address into the Web address field :
http://<remote_AW_IP_address>/modality–csd/serviceDesktop/index.htm <Enter>
(replace <remote_AW_IP_address> with the IP address of the workstation on which you wish to run
the Common Service Desktop).
The Common Service Desktop Home Page displays (see Illustration 3).
2-3 Remote access from InSite

• Connect to the AW remotely, and launch the Telnet Tool (Connect tool)
• Click on the CSD REDIR access button of the Telnet Tool .
The Common Service Desktop Home Page displays (see Illustration 5).

3 Using the Service Tools

• You can access the Service Tools from the Common Service Desktop menu bar. Click the button for
the Service Tool menu you want to use.
Illustration 4 Using the Service Tools
These options are explained below.
3-1 Home (System Health Page)

The System Health Page displays by default when you first access the Common Service Desktop, or
whenever you select the Home button. You can also access the same information using the script
insite/scripts/healthpage.sh <Enter>
In this case, the information is displayed in the Command window (and the color highlighting used in the
CSD Health Page is not available). You can also send the results to a file, as in the following example:
healthpage.sh > /tmp/toto <Enter>
The CSD Health Page provides a "dashboard"-style summary of key software and hardware details for
the workstation. FEs should use this information to evaluate what remedial or preventive maintenance
actions, if any, are required.
Note: Certain data and statuses are color-coded to indicate whether they fall within the normal operating
range.
Note: You can also use this page to verify the most critical information held on the AW Configuration Form
(See AW Installation Manual, Chapter 3).

Illustration 5 The AW System Health Page
(This screen is a composite image.) To display the upper or lower section of this page, use the browser’s
right-hand scroll bar. Note: Content will vary slightly depending on the workstation model and
configuration. (The above example is for a Z800).

Information is provided in the following categories:
Section Description Generic Recommended Actions

Identification This section lists key configuration See the next table for specific field-
data for the workstation’s hardware related Actions.
and software.
Note: A BIOS version shown here as,
for instance 3.7, corresponds to the
BIOS 03.07
Hardware This section shows temperatures, fan Hardware data that falls within safe
speeds and statuses for the operating thresholds will be shown
workstation case, CPU, GPU, RAM against a green background.
memory, Power supply and Hard Where data is shown against a grey
disks. background, no official operating
Note: Fan data is shown for the thresholds are available. Use your
workstation case fan and memory fan. experience to evaluate this data.
The SMART Health column for hard Any parameters shown against a red
disks uses Self Monitoring and background indicate hardware
Reporting Technology to predict disk anomalies that fall outside
likely disk failures. recommended operating thresholds .
Investigate these immediately, as
Memory active/total shows the amount urgent remedial action is probably
of memory used by applications, required.
against the total fitted.. - Physically open case (follow safety
guidelines from See Chapter 3, section
4).
- Verify faulty part(s) visually. Are fans
spinning? Are power cables
connected? Physical signs of damage?
Red status for CPU, GPU, Hard disk,
etc: may indicate a problem with the
corresponding fan, or environment,
rather than the part itself.
Red status for Memory active/total:
- Check this corresponds to memory
physically fitted.
- Reboot the workstation to see if
problem persists.
- Check logfiles for possible memory
leak.
- Use the top command to sort
processes by memory usage.
- Recommend customer uses fewer
Applications concurrently.
- Certain types of image / analysis are
also particularly memory hungry.
- Consider adding more RAM.


Hardware (continued) Red status for Power Supply : check
the LED (refer to the Diagnostic table
at the start of Chapter 2 for reference
to the relevant section of the HP
Service Manual for the workstation).
Red status for disk temperature:
Occurs if disk temperature exceeds the
trip threshold. Actions as for disk Smart
Health, below.
Red status for disk Smart Health :
- Check disk fan and cables first.
- Order replacement disk and fit as
soon as possible. See Job Card
TSG004. (Disk numbering on the
Health Page is physically from bottom
to top in the bay array of the
workstation case.
Note: to perform more exhaustive
diagnostic tests, use the HP
Diagnostics software, provided on CD
with the workstation.
If these checks do not resolve the
problem, you may need to order and
replace faulty parts. See Chapters 3
and 4.
Environment configuration See Field Label / Meaning table below Ensure this configuration is consistent
for explanation of these fields with the workstation’s site-specific role.
Partitions This section lists disk partition usage Ensure that adequate space remains
data. Highlighted in yellow and then in the partitions.
red if nearly full. - Use Diagnostics\Disk content to
check for large files (call OLC before
deleting).
- Check logfiles for any highlighted
partition. If export/home1 is nearly full,
recommend customer identifies image
that could be archived / pushed to
another storage location.
- Recommend customer activates
Autodelete function (check if active in
Environment Configuration section of
Health Page).


Network This section details the configurations - Physically check NIC card and cable
of enabled ethernet connections: eth0 for damage.
by default, and eth1 if a Direct Connect - Cable must be category 5E or 6.
link has been set up. - Check that local network is Up or if
issues are network wide.
- Check router is compatible
- Ensure that network connections are
properly configured and operating as
expected.
If speed is 10Mb/sec or less, or if
Duplex is Half, performance issues
may occur.
Queue Status This section lists jobs scheduled from Ensure that no queue indicates a job
the workstation that are still queued. buildup.
Subsystem Status This section provides statuses for Pay particular attention to any
several mandatory software subsystems highlighted in red. Try
subsystems. rebooting to see if issue is resolved. If
not, check logfiles:
postgreslog (database server log)
prslog (print server log)
dcslog (data comms log)
dicomprintlog (DICOM print log)
In particular, you should verify the following fields, and if necessary take the Recommended Action.
Field If content / status is… Recommended action is….
AW Config System ID ...different from value shown in next Synchronize the two IDs manually (use
field, InSite Checkout System ID the Perform full configuration screen
this field will be highlighted in red. and change the GE System ID of the
Note: the value displayed here will be Station field to match the InSite
00000000 if not configured. During an Checkout System ID shown on the
InSite checkout this field is auto- Health Page in the next field.
populated by the value held for the See the AW Installation Manual, Job
workstation by the Back Office. Card IST002.
InSite Checkout System ID If a checkout has been successfully Consider performing a checkout.
done, the value held for the
workstation by the GE Back Office will
be displayed.
The status not configured will be
displayed (in yellow) if InSite has not
been purchased, or no checkout has
been done.
Date, time & time zone ...wrong (when compared against Execute the yast2 timezone command
(page header line) actual local time) in a terminal window (as root user) to
change time, timezone and/or date, or
to configure an NTP server.
See AW IM, Job Card IST009 for more
details of NTP server configuration.

Important! Always reboot the workstation after modifying time and date settings.
The meaning of the other fields on this page should be self-explanatory. The following table explains
those fields whose labels and content may not be immediately obvious.
Field label Meaning
Next DST changes Lists the dates and times of the next two scheduled changes to
Daylight Savings Time (or equivalent) for the selected time zone
(as indicated next to the time and date, at the top of the page).
Licensing CoLA configuration Application Licensing mode (standalone or floating network). See
the AW IM, Job Card IST005 for details.
Firewall PNF status Default is ON. See the AW IM, Job Card IST004 for further details.
Preferences Sharing Manager (PSM) Status of the Preferences Sharing Manager. See the AW IM, Job
status Card IST004 for details.
Network Time Protocal (NTP) status Status of NTP configuration. See the AW IM, Job Card IST009 for
details.
Note: Data displayed on the Health Page is retrieved from the sdc/logfiles.healthpage.out file. The time at
which data was last refreshed is indicated at the top of the page. It is NOT auto-refreshed. You can
refresh it manually by clicking the Refresh All button at the top of the page. (There is a 15 sec delay
before displayed data is updated.)
3-2 Error log Viewer menu

• Click on the Error Logs button.
The ”Welcome to the Advantage Workstation Logviewer Application” screen displays.
1. Select the TerraLog Viewer option. The Error Logs Viewer window displays.

• Select the appropriate date and time for the review (start and end)
• Select the logfile to review
• Click on the Show Log button.
The logfile displays in the Log Data window.

• To filter the listed log entries, use the Filter log tool. Select one or more columns, enter the filter
cryteria (the text that the colums shall contain) for these colums, and click on the Show Results
button.
• Click on another Logfile to review, or quit the Service Tools menu when done.
All Logfiles are located in /export/home/sdc/logfiles directory and can be viewed through the command
line interface (Command Window) using standard Linux commands.
3-3 Diagnostics menu

• Click on the Diagnostics icon. The Service Tools window displays.
1. Click to select/open the folder of the desired Service Tools

2. Click to select the desired Service Tools
You will be prompted to enter the root password once, prior to get access to the tools.
3. Type in the root password in the password field, and click on Ok when done.
The available Service Tools entries are as follows:

3-3-1 Database Management Menu
- List patients in alphabetical order

- List exams given the patient name

- List exams given the patient internal number (pXX)
- List images given the series internal number (sXX)
- Dump header of image
- Create a compressed tarfile with images of series
- Recover Database
- View database recovery progress
3-3-2 Network Menu
- List Hosts
- Send DICOM echo
3-3-3 Postscript Printer Menu
- View printer status
- View Print queue
3-3-4 Dicom Print Menu
- View printer status
- View Print queue
3-3-5 Dicom MOD Menu
Note: Insert an initialized Maxoptix MOD media into the drive for successful completion of the test.
- View DICOM MOD media status
3-3-6 CDR Media Menu
Note: Insert an initialized Dicom CD media into the drive for successful completion of this test.
- View CDR media status
3-3-7 Process Management Menu
- Restart AW
- List of running processes
- Kill a process
- Restart a process
- View process size in KB
3-3-8 System Menu
- Check partitioning
- Create compressed crash logfile. This option creates a file with the extenstion crash.tar.gz in the /tmp
director, containing logfile, system and user configuration data.
- View AW configuration
- Disk Content summary. This option provides the following data, which you can use to assist disk
housekeeping:
• Current files and directories are listed in size order. (There may be a slight delay while data is

• Directories are listed in current size order.
Important! Do not attempt to delete any files without seeking advice from the OLC.
3-3-9 Licensing Menu

Use these options to test Floating License configuration, if this feature is enabled. See the AW IM, Job
Card IST005 for more details of Floating Licenses.
- View Client and Server information
- Application license test
- Send version information to server

- View all client information on serverT
3-3-10 Postfetch Menu

Postfetch (PF) is a feature which enables exams belonging to the same Patient to be fetched down from
Remote Hosts connected to the AW. PF criteria can be based on:
• Exams date
• Remote Hosts
The PF procedure can be started manually, or in background - for example if a new patient is declared
on the AW.
When PF is running in background, it starts to search exams of the newly declared patient on the
Remote Host and if finds then fetches down to the AW.
Important! For supplementary information, see the following references:

• Appendix A (Use Cases for Postfetch Diagnostic tools) of DOC0968917 - Service Note:
AW4.5_05 release introduction
• Chapter 6, Section 4 of the AW VolumeShare 5 User Guide (For an explanation of how the
Postfetch can be enabled and configured by the User)
• JobCard IST002 of the AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6) Installation Manual (how to configure
Postfetch performance parameters).
Two related Diagnostics tools are available:
Log analyzer
This tool retrieves information from the Postfetch log and from the gzipped AW Postfetch log and
displays it on the screen. It can be used when the Customer complains about not retrieved Patients. FE
can filter for the history of a specific Patient and see what happened.

The following filters are available:
Filter by Patient::
• All: will retrive log information for every Postfetched patient
• Selected in AW Browser : will retrieve Postfetch information for the patient currently selected in
AW
• By Patient Id: If checked, provide the patient Id in the field below. Log details will be returned for
only the selected patient.
Filter by Time:
• Since last Postfetch startup: returns Postfetch related data since the last AW startup
• Between dates: select the Start and End dates for log information
- Statistics
- This tool displays historical data for Postfetch operations on the workstation according to the options
selected below:

Note: The workstation’s Postfetch parameters are defined on the Configuration menu, Perform full
configuration screen. Do not change the defaults without advice from the OLC.
3-4 Configuration menu

Most of the options of this menu are used as part of initial configuration of the workstation. They are
explained by Job Card IST002 (see AW Installation Manual). These options can be used at other times
to reconfigure the workstation.
• The Remote License Manager option is explained by Job Card IST005 (see AW Installation Manual).
• Use the Print current AW Parameters option to display and then print a summary of configuration
settings.
3-5 Utilities menu

The options in this menu allow you to check or configure the following parameters:
• Product Network Filters (PNF) management.

It allows you to enable or disable the network services locked by the AW internal Firewall.
• CCOW configuration (for RIS synchronization)
• SoftSwitch configuration (for RIS synchronization: use AW/SA mouse and keyboard for the RIS PC)
• Service Documentation access.
• GE Service Sites access. These sites are only accessible if the HTTP proxy has been suitably
configured. Refer to section 4 GE Service Sites web links.
• Advanced Service Tools: PSM Server Configuration. Configuration of the Preferences server.
• Advanced Service Tools: Applications Usage Monitor. Retrieve statistics for usage of Applications
installed on the workstation.
• Advanced Service Tools: Compatibility Checker. Configuration of the Applications compatibility
checker
• Advanced Service Tools: Session Record utility. Record videos and related technical data to assist
trouble-shooting of issues on the workstation.
• GE Remote Update. Configuration of the Software Download (SWD) feature.
Note: The configuration tools on the Utilities menu are explained in more detail by Job Card IST004 (in the
AW IM).
3-6 Image Quality/Calibration/Replacement/PM menus
Note: Access to the Image Quality, Calibration, Replacement and PM Description features, is not
implemented for the present release.
3-7 Anonymous Maker tool

Prior to sending image files to OLCs or Engineering for problem analysis purposes, it is mandatory (unless

otherwise specified by OLC or Engineering) to anonymize the patient’s images.
4 GE Service Sites web links

This option on the Utilities menu provides links to the following GE Service sites (internet connection
required):
• eLicense - Use this site to check license keys for AW Applications
• eGIB This site is a portal to the Global Installed Base database. GE SSO required.
• GE Remote Update Server - See section GE Remote Update - Client Configuration on page 124
• AW Configuration Collection Tool - This web site is for collecting configuration data for all AW Linux
Workstations in the GE installed base. Normally FEs should upload data using the AW Configuration
Analyzer Tool (AWCAT) tool. Follow the instructions supplied on the site in FMI (Field Modification
Instruction) Document 80126. Refer to the AW IM, Job Card IST009 for more details.
• AW Support Central - This is the Advantage Workstation support site. A GE SSO is required for
access to this site
• AW Service Information - This Global Web Site provides useful technical documentation and updates
including FMI instructions and Service Notes.
• FE home page
• GE DICOM - This Global Web Site provides GE product DICOM Conformance Statements.
To access the GE Service Web Links from an AW workstation, you need to configure the web browser's
HTTP Proxy settings, as follows.
1. From the AW browser, select Admin\Command Window

2. Enter the following commands:
cd /export/home/insite
cat sclink.cfg

Note: this file will exist only if an InSite checkout has been carried out. See AW IM, Job Card IST008 for
details.)
3. Note the IIProxyIP address and the IIProxyPort (normally 80)

4. From the AW browser, select Admin\Service Tools
5. In Firefox, select Edit\Preferences
6. Select Advanced, then the Network tab, then the Settings button.
7. On the Connection Settings screen, carefully note the configured Proxy Settings. In particular, if
Manual proxy configuration is selected, note the Proxy address and Port.
8. Select Manual proxy configuration and enter the settings you noted from the sclink.cfg file.
9. Enable the Use this proxy server for all protocols option.
10. Click OK, then Close
Note: When you have finished using the GE Service Web Links, RESTORE the Firefox Connection Settings to
those you noted in step 3. Otherwise any access to the internet that the customer may have
configured will be prevented.
Note: Even with an internet connection, some of the links above, or indirect links from those sites, may not
be accessible from the local workstation and are provided here for information. Tip: If access from an
AW workstation is not possible, use a GE laptop to access these sites, via an internet connection.
5 GE Remote Update - Client Configuration

GE Remote Update (also known as Software Download -SWD) is a global GE Service Tool for remote
download and installation of software upgrades to AW Apps.
The Remote Update client software is embedded in the AW4.6 software.
GE Service Support may be asked to Activate/De-activate Remote Update for a customer site, or to
modify the tool configuration based on customer's need.
Note: GERU has self-upating capability, which means that the following information, given at the time of the
release of this Service Manual, is subject to change depending on the GERU downloaded contents. In
the case of a new version of GERU, which may be installed remotely, the related features shown in the
GUI may also differ from those shown in the following examples.
5-1 Pre-requisite
To be operational, Remote Update requires that the workstation has a Broadband connection, and that
InSite checkout is successfully configured.
• If InSite is not to be installed on your site, it is recommended to disable the GERU feature, in order to
prevent a large SWD logfile filled with connection errors.
• If InSite is not yet installed on the site, but will be at a later date, keep the GERU feature enabled.

5-2 GERU Configuration steps

GERU is activated and configured by default on the AW workstation.
• From the CSD / Utilities menu, click GE Remote Update.
• Click on Configuration.
A Login window pops up, asking for the root password, then the following screen displays.
• Click on the Configure Remote Update button.

The following screen displays:

3 4
We recommend that you keep the default settings, unless requested by the customer to modify any of
the polling parameters, or request to disable the tool.
In case you would need to modify the settings:
1. Click on Activate/De-activate to enable/disable the GERU tool.
Make sure that your customer authorizes automatic download of software.
2. Select the polling frequency. This is the frequency for the Remote Update Server to poll your AW
system, and check if software is up to date, and in the other case, to propose updates.
3. Also select the best time for the GERU poll activity (the workstation must be usually up at this time,
and as much as possible, not heavily used by the customer.
4. Select the Bandwidth. For example, "Unlimited" bandwidth will have the highest impact on the
workstation's performances seen by the customer, but the software update packages transfer time
will be the shortest. We recommend that you select a limited bandwidth, in order to lower the impact
for the customer.
5. Click on "Apply Properties" to save the GERU Client configuration.
"Restart Software" to make the configuration settings effective.
5-3 GE Remote Update process

• After any Application upgrade has been created, validated, and verified, it will be made available for
GERU enabled systems, via a production server at GEHC.
• On a regular basis, customers’ systems that have the GERU feature "Activated" will automatically
send their configuration to the server. A configuration assessment will be performed on the Server
and return the link to available Applications upgrades.
• The customer's system will then download the software upgrades.

• The customer will be notified by the system of availability of an auto-installable software upgrade. At
next system restart (Restart AW, Login, System Reboot), customer will be prompted to install
immediately, to postpone or reject installation.
• The new Configuration file and the installation report will be sent back to the Remote Update Server,
including the input data needed for Service database registration of the Apps software upgrade.
• The process is fully automatic and does not require FE intervention.
5-4 Manual execution of GE Remote Update
Note: At any time, the GE Remote Update steps can be executed manually.
• Click on Query Updates
This option is a mechanism to force an immediate check of new software updates. The AW configuration
is automatically sent to the server. A configuration assessment is performed on the Server. The link to
available AW software upgrades is returned and displayed on the AW workstation.
• Click on Download Updates
This option allows the customer' system to force check for new software upgrades available for its
configuration on Remote Update Server. The new software upgrades are automatically downloaded.
Download may take several hours in order to limit impact on network capacity. The Download status is
then displayed on customer's workstation.
When software updates are downloaded on the customer's workstation, the customer is notified by the
system of availability of new software upgrades. At next system restart (Restart AW, Login, System
Reboot), customer will be prompted to install immediately, to postpone or reject installation.
Note: The new software upgrades are automatically downloaded (including any update to the GERU client
software).
• Click on Update status
This feature provides current Remote Update process execution status for applications software
upgrades download & installation on the customer's workstation. They can be in one of the states
(Installed / Downloaded / Failed (download or installation)/ Cancelled).
For further details, refer to the GE Remote Update Service Manual.
5-5 Troubleshooting GE Remote Update

5-5-1 GERU logfiles
Remote updates events are logged on the AW Workstation and can be consulted in CSD.
• Click on Configuration.
A Login window pops up, asking for the root password.
Click on View Remote Update Logs button.
Software Download detailed logs are available in Download Logs and Installation Logs.

• Click on Installation History to display a summary of the Apps remote updates installation on the
customer workstation.
5-5-2 Reverting Updates
After installation, in some exceptional cases the customer may ask to revert to the previous release of
the Application. Note: It is not possible to re-download from the server an application release that has
been reverted.
Reverting an application is a manual process that requires the GE Field engineer to visit the site and
install the previous application release by using the latest CDROM available on site.
After installing the previous application release, the FE must send a 'Revert Report' to the Server, with
details of the latest release installed on the customer 'workstation':
• Select the Service Tools option from the Admin menu in the AW main panel.
• In the Utilities menu, click GE Remote Update.
• Click Revert report, and enter the root password if asked.
• Select the application reverted among the list of installed applications,
• Enter the Service dispatch number - Request For Service (RFS) number - corresponding to the
customer tracking issue.
5-6 Preventive Maintenance for GE Remote Update

Software Download does not require specific Preventive Maintenance, however it is recommended to
perform basic checks during AW Preventive Maintenance:
• Check that the GERU client is activated and configured according to customer's need
• Check that the Apps software upgraded remotely have been delivered in a FMI kit. The Apps
software media are mandatory for further AW reload.
• Check that the Apps software upgrades are properly declared in GIB.
Note: GERU client configuration is saved/restored with the AW workstation preferences files.
6 Applications Compatibility Checker

When you carry out a new installation, you may not have an up-to-date "Applications compatibility
matrix" available on your USB memory stick, to be uploaded to your AW workstation.
However, new AW systems are sytematically preloaded with the latest set of applications, so you do not
normally need to use of the "Applications Compatibility Checker" tool at installation time.
This step is normally required as part of routine Planned Maintenance.

Refer to Job Card PM004, for the procedure to retrieve an up-to-date Compatibility matrix from the Web
server site, and upload it on your AW workstation.
Note: The Compatibility matrix is not available at the time of AW4.6 product introduction. Do not use the
Compatibility Checker until a service update is announced or a new matrix is uploaded on the AW-IB
web site.

7 Session Record
7-1 Overview
The Session Record tool lets you record details of an interactive user session, for instance in order to
provide assistance for customer complaint reporting. A session includes a video recording of the user’s
commands and interactions with applications, as well as details of files accessed and technical details
about software and hardware usage. For more details See section Using Saved Sessions on page 133
Note: If Session Record does not function correctly, check that the HTTP Server process is running, and that
the 8080 port is open. See Job Card TSG006 for details.
Important! If the session will display identifable personal data, you should anonymize this data before
starting to record, or risk legal infringement. TIP: Use the Anonymous Maker Tool, available
from the Software Manager menu (see Job Card TSG011). Or consider whether your session
can use the generic Demo Scans provided.
7-2 Running Session Record

7-2-1 Record New Session
You can launch the Session Record in one of two ways:
• Open a terminal window and type sessionRecord, or
• - From the CSD menu bar, select the Utilities button.
- Then from the Utilities\Advanced Service Tools menu, select the Session Record option.
If you have problems running Session Record, check that the workstation’s IP address has been
correctly added to the Firefox browser’s list of non-proxied addresses. See section Add
Workstation IP to Firefox’s Non-proxied List on page 138
7-2-2 Refresh Display of Session Record Home Page
In some rare circumstances, if you navigate away from the Session Record feature page and then back to it,
the page may not display properly and will appear blank, until you close the Session Record tool and then click
again on the Advanced Service Tools\Session Record menu option to redisplay the page.
If the Session Record home page does not display when you select the Advanced Service Tools\Session
Record menu option in other circumstances, re-click the option to display the page.

Open New SessionIf there is at least 25% (150Mb) free from the total 600Mb allocated to sessions, the
Session Recorder opening screen displays, prompting you to name the new session:
Note: If less than 150Mb is available for the new session, the Session Management screen displays. You can
also access this screen using the Session Management button on the Session Recorder screen. (The
button is greyed out if no recorded sessions exist on the hard disk.)
For more details, see the topic in this Job Card - See section Session Management on page 134
To verify or change the recording quality of the session, click the Set Recording Preferences button. The
following screen displays:
• Use the Left and/or Right Screen buttons according to system configuration and which screen(s) you
want to record in the session.
• Configure the following options using the slider bars, to determine the recording quality of the
session, and the disk space used:

Option Value Range
Quality High...Medium (default)...Low
Frames / Sec 20...15 (default)...10
Rescale 100...80 (default)...60%
Click the Apply button to save your recording preferences, then use the Close, or Record buttons to
return to the main workflow. If at least one session has already been saved to hard disk, the Session
Management button is also available (see Session Management section, below).
Note: Click the Set to Default button to restore the default settings.
A recording of the session starts when you click OK on the Recording Preference screen, or Record on
the Session Recorder opening screen. You should now perform the application procedures that you wish
to record.
At the bottom (or top) of the session screen, a Recording Control widget displays the available file space
remaining, and with option buttons to Pause / Resume record, Stop record or Exit Recorder.
Note: When all the file space allocated to saved sessions (600Mb) is used up, the open session will be
automatically terminated.

When you Stop the recording, or the system terminates it, you are prompted to add a written comment
which will be saved with the session.
7-3 Saving Sessions

Form the Session Recorder main screen, you can save a session report to hard disk, USB, CD or DVD,
for subsequent playback and data analysis.
The available options are explained below.
7-3-1 Save to USB
Important! Before using this option, make sure that a memory device is mounted on one of the
workstation’s USB ports. For details of how to do this, see Job Card TSG007. Note that it is not
necessary to mount the USB device from the command line. The software will automatically
recognize a device when it is plugged into a USB port.
When you select the Save to USB option, the following screen displays:
• Select an attached USB memory device from the drop-down list.

• However, when you save a session to a USB device, the displayed name in the drop-down list may
not correspond to the volume name of the device. For instance, a device whose volume name is
LICENSES may display in the drop-down list as Generic, or <manufacturer name>, depending on the
device type.

• Click Save to USB. The Recorder checks whether there is enough free space on the media, and if
not a warning displays. A message confirms when the session report has been successfully saved
on the USB device. Do not remove it before file saving has finished.
• To return to the Session Recorder main screen, click Cancel.
7-3-2 Save to Cdrom/DVD
A screen equivalent to the Save to USB option displays.
7-3-3 Restart Recorder
A warning screen displays, prompting you to confirm:
If you select Yes, you will be returned to the Session Recorder screen. The last session name is retained
by default, and any associated Comment will be retained.
7-3-4 Close
This option saves the session report to the workstation hard disk (the filepath is indicated when you
save). A confirmation displays. Session Recorder then closes.
Note: You should ensure that all session-related data is retained on the hard disk and/or copied to external
media for further analysis. (This includes unmodified images that have been accessed during the
session.)
7-4 Using Saved Sessions

Saved sessions can be retrieved in the following ways:
• From USB, CD, or DVD
• From hard disk, using InSite
Normally GE Engineering is responsible for analysing customer sessions.
Sessions can also be copied to a Windows PC in order to playback the associated AVI movie files with
standard media player packages.
To retrieve a session saved to the hard disk, locate the correspondingly named subdirectory, under the
following:
/export/home/sdc/problemreport/session
For example: /Hiqual20fps01
Sessions are stored in compressed (.ZIP) format. They include the following content:
• the generated movie (.avi format)
• selection files (images) used during the recording session
• user comments
• technical data about hardware and software usage from the session. You can use this to diagnose
issues in the field.

7-5 Session Management

If you try to record a new session and less than 150Mb is available from the 600Mb available for
recordings, the Session Management screen displays:
It lists all saved sessions, for which there is an overall file size limit of 600 Mb. You can also access this
screen using the Session Management button on the main Session Recorder screen.
Note: If the saved sessions occupy more than 75% of this allocated file space, a warning displays,
prompting you to delete and/or archive one or more saved sessions to free up space.
If this is the case you can select one of the following option buttons:
• Delete
• Save to CDRom/DVD
• Save to USB
Caution: Ensure that sessions are no longer needed for investigation before you delete
them. If space must be made on the hard disk, copy sessions to external media
unless you are sure that they are not needed.
Once 150Mb (25%) of the allocated file space is available, you can click the Start Session Recorder
button to access the Session Recorder opening screen.

7-6 Display Session Record Log Viewer
To display debug information about Session Record, click the Show Status button that appears at the bottom
of the Session Record home page while the tool is running.
8 Applications Usage Monitor
8-1 Overview
AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6) allows you to track application usage for (compatible applications). Data is
compiled in a database by EAT (Enterprise Audit Trail.) This data is transferred regularly to GE Back
Office. It is also available for analysis on the workstation, from the CSD Utilities menu, and from the Root
menu\Service Tools sub-menu.
Data is specific to the local workstation. The tool lets you consult the number of times each application
has been used on exams. Results can be filtered by date range, user, and application.
Note: If Application Usage Monitor does not function correctly, check that the HTTP Server process is
running and that the 8080 port is open. See Job Card TSG006 for details.
8-2 Run Application Usage Monitor

To launch the analyzer, select Application Usage Monitor from the Utilities\Advanced Service Tools
menu. You need to login with the root password to use this feature.
If you have problems running Application Usage Monitor, check that the workstation’s IP address
has been correctly added to the Firefox browser’s list of non-proxied addresses. See section Add
Workstation IP to Firefox’s Non-proxied List on page 138

Use the initial screen to select filtering criteria:
• Click the Calendar icon next to the Start and End fields to enter a date range for metering data to
view. (The Calendar lets you pick dates from the current year and previous year.)
• Click the Reset button to clear the entered dates.
Note: By default, the Application Usage Monitor appears in the system language set on the AW workstation.
However, you can use it in English by clicking the Display in English button on the initial screen.
The next screen shows summary usage totals for each compatible application. To view details of scan
sessions for a given application, select the corresponding Click here link.

• To save the application usage summary to a USB, insert the USB device and click Save to USB
button. A pop-up screen then lets you choose between mounted USB devices.
• Select the USB device and click the Save button. Information is saved to a file named
"appusage_<ddmmyyyy>_<ddmmyyyy>.csv" (e.g. appusage_15042010_15052010.csv for start date
15 April 2010 to 15 May 2010).
• (CSV files can be opened using Microsoft Excel or similar applications.)
When you select a Click here link from the application usage summary screen, you will see the following
screen, which lists Study ID details for the selected application and date range. For each session, the
date, user and Study ID are listed.

Note: Detailed application usage data is only available for the current year and previous year.
To view summary data for any of the three years before last year, click the History button on the initial
page. Select a year from the drop down list and click Show Usage. The results are displayed.
• To save the application usage summary to a USB device, mount it on a port on the workstation and
click Save to USB. You can then select the USB device from a pop-up list.
• Click on the Save button. Information is saved to a file named "appusage_<yyyy>.csv" (e.g.
appusage_2008.csv for year 2008).
8-3 Configuring Application Usage Data Export
It is possible to send Application Usage Data automatically to the GE Back Office for analysis. By default this
feature is disactivated (Off). This is the recommended setting, which FEs should not modify on site.
In exceptional cases the OLC may activate this feature as follows:

1. Login remotely to the AW.
2. Select Application Usage Monitor from the Utilities\Advanced Service Tools menu.
(You need to login with the root password to use this feature.)
3. Select Configure Application Usage Export Data
4. Select the On button.
5. Click Apply.
9 Add Workstation IP to Firefox’s Non-proxied List
Use these instructions to check whether Firefox is correctly configured to run Application Usage Monitor,
Session Record, or Service webpages from the Common Service Desktop.
When an InSite checkout occurs on an AW Workstation, the AW workstation’s IP address is normally added to
the Firefox browser’s list of addresses for which an HTTP proxy is not required. However, it is highly
recommended to verify this manually by executing the instructions below.
If necessary add the address to the list, to avoid potential connectivity problems (for instance with access to
Application Usage Monitor). The following message is symptomatic of such problems:
This URL is not allowed to be proxied.
Procedure to verify/add the workstation’s IP address to the non-proxied list in Firefox:

1. Find the workstation’s IP address (from the Admin.\ Display Configuration menu option, or the
Service Tools \ System Health Page ).
2. In Firefox, select Edit\Preferences
3. Click on the Advanced icon, then the Network tab, then the Settings button.

4. Click the Manual proxy configuration button.

5. In the No Proxy for: field, check whether the workstation’s IP address appears in the list, If not, add it,
separated by a comma.
Example:
localhost, 127.0.0.1, 3.349.12.34 (where 3.349.12.34 is the workstation’s IP address)
6. Click OK


Job Card TSG012 - Create a BIOS CDROM & Flash the Firmware
1 Overview
The following information was current at release date, but you should always check on the AW–IB Web
site for the latest validated BIOS version, according to workstation model.
At the time of AW4.6 introduction, applications have been fully validated with the following BIOS
versions:
• HP Z800 with the BIOS version 3.07 or later (version 3.19 is recommended for the 6-core CPU
version of the Z800)
• HP XW8600 with the BIOS version 1.33
• HP XW8400 we recommend to upgrade to BIOS 2.24c.
Important! Later BIOS versions released by HP may work fine, but may not have been verified.
- When replacing a mother board (workstation swap), you should always verify the BIOS
version supplied on the replacement FRU.
- Normally the BIOS on a new workstation will be the latest validated version, however you
should verify it.
• If the BIOS version on a new workstation or a FRU differs from the version listed above for the
corresponding workstation, check on the AW-IB website or contact the OLC to verify the latest
validated version.
• If necessary, follow the procedures below in order to upgrade OR downgrade the BIOS to the
validated version.
• After updating the BIOS on the Z800, always verify the BIOS configuration parameters. See section
5-3 Verify Z800 BIOS Configuration of this Job Card.
Note: - For technical reasons, on the System Health Page, the BIOS version field will show a BIOS such as
3.07 as 3.7.
2 Check the BIOS and Firmware

• Power on the computer. The BIOS version displays on the HP Invent screen, in the lower left corner.
• Check that the BIOS version corresponds to the version above. If not, take check the latest validated
version for the corresponding workstation, and upgrade or downgrade as necessary.
• The following sections explain how to create a CDROM that you can use to flash-upgrade the BIOS
ROM, for each of the workstation types supported by VolumeShare 5.
Note: - Even though the current BIOS and Firmware versions of your workstation may be higher than the
corresponding version listed above, we recommend that you downgrade to the validated BIOS and
Firmware versions.

3 Upgrade BIOS on XW8400

3-1 Create a Flash CDROM for the XW8400
The XW8400 BIOS is provided on Cdrom.
This step should be done only if you do not have a Flash Cdrom available. In order to do this, you
need to download from the AW–IB intranet web site onto your PC, or your AW workstation, the
appropriate ”iso file” (xw8400–bios224c.iso) and create the Flash Cdrom.
Connect to the AW–IB Web site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
(AW known problems & solutions / BIOS)
3-1-1 From an XW8400 workstation
This procedure assumes that the BIOS version is 2.24c. Adapt the procedure accordingly to the latest
approved BIOS version.
• Download the xw8400–bios224c.iso file into the /tmp directory, (you may download it first from the
Web site to your laptop then ”ftp” it to the AW station).
• Insert a blank Cdrom into the drive
• Open a Command window and switch User to root
su – root [Return]
• Change to the /tmp directory
cd /tmp [Return]
• Create the BIOS Flash Cdrom.
cdrecord dev=ATA:1,0,0 xw8400–bios224c.iso [Return]
(If the cdrecord command does not work with these parameters on the workstation, use the
command cdrecord - scanbus to find the correct parameters for the mounted CD drive.)
3-1-2 From a PC Personal Computer
• Download the xw8400–bios224c.iso file from the AW-IB web site
• Launch the CD recorder utility to create the BIOS CD
The instructions to create the CD depend on the CD/DVD recorder utility you have on your PC.
You shall record the CD as an ISO CD.
3-2 Flash the XW8400 BIOS and Firmware

The BIOS Flash Cdrom is not a bootable Cdrom.
You will have to execute the following procedure to flash your BIOS:
• Turn on the workstation.
• At startup, press <F10> to enter the HP Setup utility.
• Select the language for BIOS instructions (i.e: English)
• Insert the XW8400 BIOS flash Cdrom into the DVD drive
• In menu File, select Flash System ROM, then Optical drive
• Press <F10> for entering the upgrade process.

• Press <F10> for accepting the upgrade process, after having selected the appropriate file (7D5
0117.BIN in our example for BIOS 1.17 and 7D50224.BIN for BIOS 2.24).
• Press <F10> for accepting the upgrade process.

! Notice:
DO NOT TURN OFF WORKSTATION while the BIOS is being flashed.
Once the flash process has completed, the following message displays
• Press any key to exit from the Flash System ROM menu.
• In menu File, select Save Changes and Exit
• Press <F10> to save changes and exit from BIOS menu.

The workstation reboots.
• You can eject the ROM Flash Cdrom from the drive.

• Check that the validated BIOS version now displays in the bottom left of the screen.
4 Upgrade BIOS on XW8600

4-1 Create a Flash CDROM for the XW8600
This procedure assumes that the BIOS version is 1.33. Adapt the procedure accordingly to the latest
The XW8600 BIOS is provided on Cdrom.

This step should be done only if you do not have a Flash Cdrom available. In order to do this, you
need to download from the AW–IB intranet web site onto your PC, or your AW workstation, the
appropriate ”iso file” (xw8600–bios133.iso) and create the Flash Cdrom.
Connect to the AW–IB Web site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
• Download the xw8600–bios133.iso file into the /tmp directory, (you may download it first from the
Web site to your laptop then ”ftp” it to the AW station).
cd /tmp [Return]
cdrecord dev=ATA:0,0,0 xw8600–bios133.iso [Return]
(If the cdrecord command does not work with these parameters on the workstation, use the
command cdrecord - scanbus to find the correct parameters for the mounted CD drive.)
4-2 Flash the XW8600 BIOS and Firmware

The BIOS Flash Cdrom is not a bootable Cdrom.
The process to flash the XW8600 BIOS is the same as the one described previously in section 3-2 Flash
the XW8400 BIOS and Firmware, except for the following preliminary setup:
The DVD Drive is now SATA, so it is not visible for BIOS update until it is emulated as IDE.
Therefore you must proceed as follows:

1. Emulate the DVD drive as IDE
• Boot the XW8600 and press <F10> at HP logo
• Got to "Storage" -> "Storage Option" -> "SATA Emulation" and switch it to "Combined IDE
controller", then press <F10> to accept the change.
• Go to "File" -> "Save changes and exit"
• Reboot the workstation
2. Proceed with the BIOS flash update to v1.33
• Boot the XW8600 and press <F10> at HP logo

• Go to "File" -> "Flash BIOS" -> select "Optical drive", then press <F10> to begin the Flash
upgrade. Refer to Section 3. The process is the same as for XW8400.
DO NOT power off workstation during the upgrade !!!
3. Reset the DVD drive as SATA
You must now reset the DVD drive to the previous "SATA" configuration. Failing to do so, the workstation
would not boot.
• Got to "Storage" -> "Storage Option" -> "SATA Emulation" and switch it back to "RAID+AHCI",
then press <F10> to accept the change.
• Go to "File" -> "Save changes and exit"
• Reboot the workstation
The workstation reboots.
• You can eject the ROM Flash Cdrom from the drive.
• Check that the validated BIOS version now displays in the bottom left of the screen.
5 Upgrade BIOS on Z800

The procedure assumes that the BIOS version is 3.19. Adapt the procedure accordingly to the latest
Note: This procedure uses the BIOS 3.19 as an example. Always use the latest version available on the
site.
5-1 Create a Flash CDROM / USB for the Z800
The Z800 BIOS is normally provided on CDROM.

This step should be done only if you do not have a Flash Cdrom available. In order to do this, you need
to download from the AW–IB intranet web site onto your PC, or your AW workstation, the appropriate
”iso file” (z800–bios319.iso) and create the Flash CDROM.
• Connect to the AW–IB Web site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
• Download the z800–bios319.iso file (or later) into the /tmp directory on the AW. (Alternatively, you
may first download it from the AW–IB Web site to your laptop, then ”ftp” it to the AW station).
• Insert a blank CDROM into the AW’s Optical drive
cd /tmp [Return]
cdrecord dev=0,0,0 z800–bios319.iso [Return]
Troubleshooting
If the above command does not work, execute the command

cat /export/home/sdc/app-defaults/Xapplresdir/Dms.dev [Return]

then verify contents of the CDR_CDRECORD: line
OR use the command cdrecord - scanbus to find the correct parameters for the mounted CD drive
5-2 Flash the Z800 BIOS and Firmware

Two alternative procedures are given below to update the BIOS from CDROM: F10 UPDATE and
FAILSAFE BOOTBLOCK RECOVERY.
! Notice:
DO NOT TURN OFF POWER OR ATTEMPT TO REBOOT THE COMPUTER DURING THE
UPGRADE PROCESS!!!
5-2-1 F10 Update Procedure
1. Boot the Z800 and press <F10> at the HP logo prompt, to launch the Setup Utility.
2. Set SATA Emulation to IDE:
Storage-> Storage Options -> SATA Emulation->IDE (use the right/left navigation keys)
Press <F10> to accept from the Storage Options window
File->Save Changes and Exit-> <F10>=Yes
This saves the IDE settings and reboots the system
3. Insert the Bios CD in the CD/DVD drive.

4. Press <F10> at the HP logo prompt, to launch the Setup Utility .
5. Select Flash System ROM from the file menu.
File->Flash System ROM
Select CD-ROM from the Flash System ROM window
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to select the System BIOS and update the firmware.
Note: DO NOT power off or reboot the workstation during the Bios flash.
7. Eject the ROM Flash Cdrom from the drive.
8. Reset the DVD drive to the previous "SATA" configuration. Failing to do so, the workstation would
not boot correctly:
Enter F10 Setup utility. Set SATA Emulation option back to RAID+AHCI.
Storage-> Storage Options -> SATA Emulation->RAID+AHCI
Press <F10> to accept from the Storage Options window
File->Save Changes and Exit-> <F10>=Yes
This saves the SATA settings and reboots the system
9. Check that the validated BIOS version now displays in the bottom left of the screen.
At boot, press <F1> to save changes and confirm that no IDE drive is present.

5-2-2 Failsafe Bootblock Recovery Procedure
Note: Use this recovery procedure ONLY in the case of a serious problem with the BIOS upgrade.
• Power the AW system up with the BIOS CD in the Optical drive. FAIL SAFE RECOVERY is
AUTOMATIC, and should take a few minutes.
• The system will reset when the recovery has completed.
5-3 Verify Z800 BIOS Configuration

After upgrading / reloading the BIOS on the Z800, it is important to verify that the following configuration
settings are restored, to optimize performance:
• Shutdown and restart the workstation.

• At the initial screen, press <F10> for the HP Setup utility.
• Verify these settings:
Power ‐‐> OS Power Management ‐‐> Runtime Power Management => Disable
Power ‐‐> OS Power Management ‐‐> Idle Power Savings => Normal
Power ‐‐> Hardware Power Management ‐‐> Enhanced Intel Turbo Boost Technology => Enable
• From the File menu select Save Changes and Exit.

The workstation will reboot with the settings applied.


Job Card TSG013 - Using the ClamAV AntiVirus Tool
1 Overview
An antivirus package called ClamAV is bundled with the AW4.6 Suse operating system. By default the
anti-virus is not activated, but in some circumstances, customers may request that it is activated.
However, the need for anti-virus on Linux-based systems such as the AW is debatable for the following
reasons:
• Linux built-in permissions apply to every file on the system, and cover read, write and execute.
Typically, software that can impact the system as a whole requires root privileges to run.
• Linux does not rely on file extensions to determine file properties; this avoids accidental launch of
malware.
• Unlike Windows™, Linux does not allow outsiders to execute software on the system (although IIP is
an exception to this).
• The AW is not designed as a workstation for use as a web-facing workstation. However, it is installed
with a PFC firewall which restricts the number of open ports. IIP rexec services are bound only to GE
IP addresses, accessed through the GE Service VPN.
• AW4.6 does not host email or IM clients.
• Prior to commercial release, AW4.6 has passed several security scans against known vulnerabilities.
Nevertheless, some customers may have a site security policy that requires antivirus. In this case, follow
the Activation Procedure below to activate ClamAV on each AW on the site.
Once activated on a workstation using the parameters described below, ClamAV provides the following
protection:
• Nightly (or manual) scans of vulnerable directories. Real-time scanning is not available as this has
serious negative impact on clinical performance.
• Only directories in which malicious file can be inadvertently installed will be scanned (if using the
parameters in the instructions below). DICOM files are not scanned, as typically these are not
susceptible to attack. The scanned directories are:
. /home/
. /export/home/
• After set-up, scan logs will be located in /export/home/sdc/logfiles

• Additional information may be found at: http://www.clamav.org/doc/latest/clamdoc.pdf
Important! The FE shall not install Antivirus by default. It shall be installed only upon customer specific
request.

Prerequisites
To be able to deploy ClamAV on the AW, the network must have:

• Possibility to connect to internet
• HTTP Proxy defined (to obtain details, contact the local Network Administrator)
2 Activation Procedure
To set-up ClamAV, perform the following steps:
2-1 Configure crontab
If necessary, change to root user. Then edit the root user’s crontab:
• Open a command window (from the Admin. menu, select Command Window).
• Enter the following commands:
. su - root
. cd /var/spool/cron/tabs
. gedit root
The gedit editor window opens. At the end of the file, add the following line:
0 3 * * * /usr/bin/freshclam > /export/home/sdc/logfiles/clam_scan.log; nice

clamscan -r -l /export/home/sdc/logfiles/clam_scan.log /home /export/home
• Save the file and quit the editor.

• The new line in the crontab will set the package to scan the listed directories nightly at 03:00. A new
logfile is created nightly (export/home/sdc/logfiles/clam_scan.log). Previous logfiles are archived.
2-2 Update virus signatures
You must now update the ClamAV virus signature database (This requires a connection to the internet).
• If necessary, change the user role to root:

. su - root
• Execute the command-line
. freshclam
This will download and update the latest virus definitions.
Note: If the system requires a proxy connection to reach the internet, the HTTPProxyServer and
HTTPProxyPort parameters in the /etc/freshclam.conf file must be edited.

In this case, open a command window and enter the following commands:
. su - root
. cd /etc
. gedit freshclam.conf
Locate the HTTP proxy parameters above, uncomment and modify them so that the lines read
HTTPProxyServer n.nnn.nnn.nn
HTTPProxyPort xx
(where n.nnn.nnn.nn is the IP of the site proxy to use, and where xx is the corresponding port).
For further details, refer to on-line documentation: http://www.clamav.net/doc/latest/man/ or the

freshclam.conf man page (man freshclam.conf)
Below is an "example" message output of a successful freshclam update. Warnings can be ignored:
ClamAV update process started at Wed Sep 8 12:16:34 2010

WARNING: Can't query current.cvd.clamav.net
WARNING: Invalid DNS reply. Falling back to HTTP mode.
Connecting via 3.249.104.45
Reading CVD header (main.cvd): OK (IMS)
main.cvd is up to date (version: 52, sigs: 704727, f-level: 44, builder: sven)
Reading CVD header (daily.cvd): OK
Downloading daily-11842.cdiff [100%]
daily.cld updated (version: 11844, sigs: 121016, f-level: 53, builder: arnaud)
WARNING: Your ClamAV installation is OUTDATED!
WARNING: Current functionality level = 51, recommended = 53
DON'T PANIC! Read http://www.clamav.net/support/faq
Reading CVD header (bytecode.cvd): OK (IMS)
bytecode.cvd is up to date (version: 40, sigs: 9, f-level: 53, builder: edwin)
Database updated (825752 signatures) from database.clamav.net
WARNING: Clamd was NOT notified: Can't connect to clamd through /var/lib/clamav/
clamd-socket connect(): No such file or directory
2-3 Test ClamAV

• To test that ClamAV is working, execute the command
. clamscan -r /export/home/sdc/logfiles
.
This will perform a test scan on the logfiles directory, directing output messages to the command
window.

2-4 Checking ClamAV Scan Results
You should ensure that ClamAV logfiles are regularly checked for potential security issues. See Job
Card TSG009 for further details of recommended logfile procedures. At a minimum, the logfile should
be examined according to the Preventive Maintenance schedule.
Important! If a virus is identified during a manual scan or in a logfile:

- Refer the issue in the first instance to the OLC. Never attempt remedial action without first
seeking advice. There is a risk that the workstation could become unstable, and/or client data
could be lost.
- Recommend to the customer that, although the risk from a virus on a Linux-based system is
very low, they should backup images stored on affected workstation(s). (It may be advisable
to check other workstations on site first, to have a full picture of the problem.)
- Backup the workstation’s configuration data to CD-Rom. See the AW IM, Job Card IST009 for
details.
Normal scan output consists of messages concerning the latest ClamAV engine, followed by a list of files
scanned, followed by a summary.
Note: The message "This version of the ClamAV engine is outdated" may be displayed, but this is normally
not very serious. The AW4.6 Suse OS includes "a" version of the ClamAV engine.New versions of this
engine may be released between OS releases, and thus the installed version of ClamAV may not be
the latest available.
If it becomes necessary to update to the most current ClamAV engine, it is the user’s responsibility to
access the website listed in the document http://www.clamav.net/support/faq and to follow the
update process.
You should pay particular attention to the "Infected files" line in the summary. Example:
----------- SCAN SUMMARY -----------

Known viruses: 824560
Engine version: 0.96
Scanned directories: 1
Scanned files: 55
Infected files: 0
Data scanned: 1.96 MB
2-5 Run ClamAV Manually
You may need to run ClamAV manually, either locally on the workstation, or via a remote login (telnet
session). You can do this with a command similar to the line you added to the crontab. Example,
directing output to a logfile:
/usr/bin/freshclam > /export/home/sdc/logfiles/clam_manual_scan.log; nice

clamscan -r -l /export/home/sdc/logfiles/clam_scan.log /home /export/home

Adapt the directories scanned and the output according to specific needs. Check the scan output / logfile
and take any necessary action as explained in the previous section.
2-6 Further Information
Refer to the ClamAV documentation online:
http://www.clamav.net/doc/latest/man/


Job Card TSG014 - Changing System Passwords
1 Overview
It is recommended to change the default passwords on pre-defined accounts on new systems, and to
change other accounts as part of regular maintenance and upgrade procedures. In particular, the pre-
defined accounts
root
sdc
administrator
insite
2 Password Change Procedure
2-1 Step 1 – Customer Consultation

When the customer or GE initiates this process, the GE FE is to coordinate a customer consultation to
discuss password provisions. As a result of that meeting the following process must be followed to
complete the password change accurately.
2-2 Step 2 – Identify New Password(s)

The customer may request specific passwords. If this is the case, get the passwords from the customer
and move on to Step3.
If a new password is to be created, the FE should do so in the following ways:
• If required, use customer rules and guidelines for password creation.
• If the FE is free to choose the password, use the following guidelines.
Passwords:
o Must be 8 characters min.
o Cannot be blank or left as the default.

o Should only contain a mix of numbers, alpha. It is not recommended to use special characters.
o Must not be made up solely of dictionary words
o May contain the system ID with at least 1 more character.
o Should not be the same value at different sites
=============================================
***Note
• Each account on a single system should have a unique password. For example, the "root" and "insite"
accounts should have different password values from each other. Using the same password for multiple
accounts on a system will remove roll-based access and decrease the level of security on a system.
• For productivity, the same password value for a single account can be used on multiple systems at a
site or customer. For example, the "insite" user could have the same non-default password value on 3
different systems in a hospital. However, make sure not to use the same value over multiple sites or
across a region, because that would essentially duplicate the original default value problem this service
note attempts to resolve.
=============================================
Good password examples:

!414555MR5
4$42CTAW
#big996622LS16
Bad password examples:
414555MR5
operator
123456789a
2-3 Step 3 – Change Device Password(s)

• After the password is identified, the FE should make the password changes on the device following
detailed instructions in the Service Documentation:
• AW4.2p AW4.3 AW4.4 AW4.5 AW4.6
Click on Admin. > Service Tools
Click Configuration > Configure single feature > Password Change
To modify a users password, select the user from the below list and click on Change Password.
• AW4.2
Click on Admin > Command Window
From the Command Window type
enter root password
cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
install.passwords [Return]
This script allows you to modify the root password, the sdc password and the administrator password at
once.
./install.passwords [Return]
Enter the name of the user whose password must be changed
– root ; sdc_admin ; sdc ; or type q to quit
Choose passwords of a least 8 characters, an assortment of lower/upper case letters, numbers, and the

grouping of letters should have no known meaning.

i.e: the following characters (which the system may assign a special meaning) should not be use:
@ ; # ; <Tab> ; <Esc> etc ..
Follow the instructions given by the script to change the password(s).
For further details of changing root, sdc_admin or sdc passwords, refer to Job Card IST002. This is
located in the AW Installation Manual for AW4.6, or in the Service Manual for prior releases.
insite password
(Not described in the AW Service Documentation.) Please follow these instructions.
o Open a Command window (click Admin / Command Window) and type the following
su – insite [Enter]
Password: 2getin [Enter]
passwd
Provide current and new password.
2-4 Step 4 – Update Password(s) in Connectivity Database

To checkout the system password follow the following procedure:
1. Contact the checkout team at 866-759-7075.
2. Inform the technician you are making password changes. Provide the System ID, and ask them to do
a checkout with all the new password values.
3. The checkout technician will verify the system ID and new password values. To reduce
miscommunication of the password verbally, consider using the phonetic alphabet listed below.
4. The technician will run a checkout and password verification procedure to update the password(s) and
inform you when the process is complete.
2-5 Step 5 – Communicate New Password(s)

After completing the checkout, follow your customer’s guidelines for password communication and
storage. Inform the customer of the new passwords with the exception of those used for remote service
only (e.g. insite).
If the customer approves, write down the new passwords and store them in a secure location on site. A
sample form is provided at the end of this Job Card, to place in a logbook or tape inside a cabinet.
In the situation where a customer wants to know more about what GE does with passwords, escalate to
the service security team (http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=24038).

2-6 Exceptions
In the case where a customer directly calls the OLC requesting a password update, the online engineer
should follow the same steps outlined in this document. Some online engineers have access to make
password changes in the back office databases, so they may execute Step 4 themselves without calling
the checkout team.
Important – Make sure to email a copy of the case to the site primary field engineer to complete Step 5.
This will ensure that local service has documentation of the change to access the system.
If you experience any problems with this procedure please contact the OLC.
2-7 Password Form

Job Card TSG015 - A3 Postscript Printing
1 Overview
A3 Printing is not currently supported with AW workstations.
The following is given for information only, as not all printer drivers have been fully validated by GEHC
Engineering. It also is subject to change, depending on the changes on the CUPS Web site and changes
of the Printer drivers.
2 Procedure
Refer to your the AW Installation Manual, Chapter 1, Job Cards IST002 and IST006 job cards for more
detailed information on postscript printer installation.
In order to setup the postscript printer in A3 format (if A3 format is supported by the printer type, and
drivers are available), you actually need to install 2 printers:
The first printer shall be installed normally in A4 format (or Letter if applicable):
e.g. Printer name: MyPrinter_A4
printer model : Lexmark
printer type: color
paper format : A4
IP address : 192.9.1.34
Hostname : MyPrinter_A4
The second printer shall also be installed in A4 format (and not Letter), but it will be updated with the A3
drivers later:
i.e : Printer name: MyPrinter_A3
printer model : Lexmark
printer type: color
paper format : A4
IP address : 192.9.1.34
Hostname : MyPrinter_A3
- restart AW as recommended
- On your laptop, open the Internet navigator and go to the following URL:
http://www.cups.org

Click on Printer Drivers tab. The following window pops up.
Search for the driver for printer A3 by putting the brand (i.e: HP) and the language in search fields, then
click on Search Printer drivers button.

Click on the driver name : e.g. 105 HP LaserJet 8100 Series (English):
a description page opens, with a link on the line “PPD Path”
Right click on the PPD link and select “Save Link Target As…” option
- Select where on your laptop you want to save the file then click on OK: the compressed file is stored as
<fileName>.gz
e.g. ppd/hp/en/hp8100_6.ppd.gz
FTP the file from your laptop to the AW. You will need to temporarily disable PNF Firewall first. Refer to
AW IM, Job Card IST004

Note: You may want to put it on /export/home/sdc/Prefs directory, in order to have it saved on your next AW
configuration CD-ROM
*********************************************************************
Note: It is also possible to do it directly from your AW, if it has access to the Internet, and the proxy server is
properly configured for the site:
• open the Mozilla Firefox internet browser (click Mozilla in AW Applications \ Tools menu)
• load the following page: http://localhost:631 . Click on “software” (be careful, the proxy server
must be configured.
• edit the “Printer Drivers” tab as explained above
*********************************************************************
Go to the AW workstation and install the driver:
- open a Command Window
- Copy the file from Prefs to /tmp directory:
cp /export/home/sdc/Prefs/<fileName>.gz /tmp [Enter]
i.e: >filename>.gz = ppd/hp/en/hp8100_6.ppd.gz)
- Uncompress the file:
gunzip /tmp/<fileName>.gz [Enter]
Note: Some drivers may not be zipped, even though they appear to be. If this is the case, the following
message will display: “gunzip: <filename>.gz: not in gzip format”.
In this case, simply rename the file to remove the .gz extension:
mv /tmp/<fileName>.gz /tmp/<fileName> [Enter]
- Switch User to root
su - root [Enter]
Enter the root password
- Copy the Printer drivers into the A3 Printer directory:
cp /tmp/<fileName> /etc/cups/ppd/MyPrinter_A3.ppd
- open Mozilla navigator from the AW User Interface
- load the following page: http://localhost:631

- On the top of the page, click on “Printers”

the list of the printers installed on the AW appears.
- Select MyPrinter_A3,
- Click on “configure printer” button (it will ask you to log as root and enter root password.

- In “General” section, modify the page size to A3 and eventually configure the output tray
(in Output Destination).
- Click on “Continue” button when done;
A message reports that MyPrinter_A3 has been configured successfully.
- Close the internet browser.
AW is ready to use the newly declared A3 printer.

Disassembly / Reassembly Procedures
Chapter 3 Disassembly / Reassembly Procedures
1 Overview
This document contains directions to be followed when replacing the computer box, or one of the
following sub–assemblies located inside the computer box.
Important! All defective parts must be returned without delay.

Parts which are not returned or otherwise accounted for (hard disks and NIC card mounted in
new workstation, for instance) will be charged to the Region.
2 Tools required
• 5 mm Phillips screwdriver.
• 5 mm flat–head screwdriver.
• Grounding wristband.
3 Prerequisites
If the workstation is switched on, exit the application. Select ”Logout” from the sdc root menu.
See Chapter 1 Basic Tools and Procedures for various other methods of shutting the system down.
• Wait for the ”Power down” message ( 30 sec) or automatic computer switch off.
• Switch off the monitor using the switch on the front.
• Switch off the computer. Switch off the SCSI device(s).
• Disconnect the cables:
- Keyboard – CPU box ; Mouse – CPU box
- Mains power supply – CPU box
- Ethernet network – CPU box
- Monitor(s) – CPU box
- SCSI – CPU box
4 Safety precautions
• The boards and hard disk drives contain electronic components that are extremely sensitive to static
electricity. Do not touch the components themselves or any metal part.
• Wear a grounding wrist strap when handling the drive assemblies, boards or cards.
• If you need to move a Z800 workstation, refer to Appendix 1 for safe handling procedures.
• Always follow the LOTO procedure when servicing an AW workstation. See section 4-1 LOTO
Procedure for Advantage Workstation
chap3_disassembly_reassembly.fm Page no. 165 Chapter 3

4-1 LOTO Procedure for Advantage Workstation
Always adhere to the Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO) procedure when installing or servicing an AW
workstation.
MODE: Imaging
EQUIPMENT: Advantage Workstation
Premises: Customer owned locations or facilities
SUBSYSTEM: None
ACTIVITY: Installation, Preventive Maintenance, Corrective Maintenance
Equipment Specific LOTO Procedures

Steps are to be completed in the order listed below
Label /Tag Energy Magnitude Location Procedure for Lockout & Zero Energy Tryout, Verification, &
Description Source Energy Release Testing
Electrical Wall Electrical 110 / 230 VAC Various Carry out workstation Verify/ Test Equipment to assure
Outlet depending on shutdown procedure, power source has been removed by
region preferably from within the depressing On/Off Switch on the
AW software, OR
workstation front panel.
by depressing the On/Off
switch on the workstation
front panel.
Disconnect the power cord
from the electrical outlet
and then from the
workstation.
Remove the power cord
and any spare power cords
from the vicinity of the
workstation.
Apply any protective
devices mandated by local
EHS legislation (LOTO
power socket locks, tags,
adaptors).
Equipment Electrical 110V / / 230 Within System Wait 5 minutes after Power Check Power Supply output using
Power Supply VAC Power Supply down to allow for discharge multi-meter for Zero Power status.
depending on of any capacitors in the
region Powers Supply
Chapter 3 Page no. 166 chap3_disassembly_reassembly.fm

GEHC Field Service General LOTO Instructions

Shut Down Steps & Return to Service Summary
The following section provides a Business Level Summary of the Key Steps for conducting a LOTO (Lockout Tagout).
Step 1: PREPARE FOR SHUTDOWN:
- Acquire LOTO training and any related training mandated by local EHS legislation.
- Understand the applicable procedures. Determine associated equipment.
- Acquire any protective materials (i.e. socket locks, tags, lock adapters).
- Access consequences of shutdown. Notify all affected persons.
Step 2: NOTIFICATION OF PERSONNEL:
- Personnel who may be affected shall be notified prior to the application and after the removal
of power cords, lockout devices or tagout devices.
- Personnel may include workstation operators, clinical users, technicians, engineers or area
managers.
Step 3: SHUTDOWN:
- Carry out workstation shutdown procedure, preferably from within the AW software, OR
by depressing the On/Off switch on the workstation front panel.
Step 4: ENERGY ISOLATION:
- Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the workstation.
- Disconnect peripheral device cables from the workstation.
- Remove the power cord and any spare power cords from the vicinity of the workstation.
Step 5: LOCKOUT TAGOUT (If mandated by local EHS legislation):
- Attach LOTO Red Lock & filled out Red Tag (or local equivalent devices) on each point of
disconnect, shut off, blank & vent as appropriate. Verify that all above is complete.
Step 6: CONTROL STORED ENERGY:
- Assure that all stored potentially hazardous energy has been relieved, dissipated, restrained,
drained or otherwise controlled (i.e. electrical capacitors) by waiting at least five minutes
between power-down and opening the workstation case.
Step 7: VERIFY ISOLATION:
- Extremely important! Do not assume the posted shutdown procedure is accurate – Report
any inaccuracies immediately to your EHS Rep.
- Verify that the equipment is fully LOTO-compliant and that all energy is zero.
- Zero energy tests shall include:
1) Attempt to operate the equipment, by the On/Off switch;
2) Check Power Supply output using a multi-meter for Zero Power status..
Caution: NEVER leave the workstation unattended with the case open. If you
must leave the workstation during servicing, resecure the case.
When you return to the workstation, check that the power cord has
not been reconnected, before opening the case. If necessary,
recommence this procedure from Step 3.
Step 8: RETURN TO SERVICE:
- Assure that maintenance schedule has been successfully completed and any faulty FRUs
replaced.
- Assure that the workstation case and vicinity are clear of tools
- Assure that all internal parts, covers and side panels have been securely reattached/
reconnected.
- Reconnect peripheral device cables to the workstation.
- Reconnect the power cord to the workstation and then electrical outlet.
- Notify affected persons that energy is to be restored.
- Removes any tags and lockout devices from power sockets.
- Reboot the workstation and assure that the equipment is functioning safely & properly.

5 Servicing Procedures
Note: On–line access to HP Service Manuals and other additional information can be obtained from the AW–
IB intranet site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
5-1 HP workstation disassembly/reassembly procedures

ITEM HP Z800 SERVICE HP XW8600 SERVICE HP XW8400 SERVICE
MANUAL 5396251–100 MANUAL 5308736–100 MANUAL 5180567–100
POWER ON/OFF AND CHAPTER 5 ; PAGE 77 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 56 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 53
INTERNAL ACCESS
REMOVING THE FRONT CHAPTER 5 ; PAGE 91 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 65 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 59
BEZEL
HARD DISK DRIVES CHAPTER 5 ; PAGE 114 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 99 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 82
DVD / CD–R DRIVE CHAPTER 5 ; PAGE 100 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 69 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 77
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE n/a CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 69 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 80
POWER SUPPLY CHAPTER 5 ; PAGE 86 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 74 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 63
SYSTEM FAN CHAPTER 5 ; PAGE 146 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 76 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 74
GRAPHICS & PCI CHAPTER 5 ; PAGE 168 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 90 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 69
CARDS
MEMORY MODULES CHAPTER 5 ; PAGE 158 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 77 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 65
SYSTEM BATTERY CHAPTER 5 ; PAGE 210 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 94 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 76
SYSTEM BOARD CHAPTER 5 ; PAGE 206 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 57 CHAPTER 4 ; PAGE 92

5-2 Parts replacement instructions

ITEM DESCRIPTION
KEYBOARD The defective keyboard does not need to be returned.

REPLACEMENT
Important! The FRU keyboard is delivered with a set of safety

labels in different languages. DO NOT remove the
existing English safety sticker. Use the sticker in the
appropriate language, and just stick upon the English
sticke This step is mandatory for the Chinese market to
be CCC compliant.
DVD / CD–R DRIVE Refer to the HP Service manual for the workstation.
REPLACEMENT Ship the defective unit to the return address mentioned within the
package, with no delay, using the ”Supplier Warranty Program process”.
Refer to section 5-5 Send back the defective unit for details
MOUSE REPLACEMENT The defective mouse does not need to be returned.
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE The defective Floppy disk drive does not need to be returned.
REPLACEMENT
HARD DISK DRIVE Make sure that the jumpers are properly set on the new disk or CD–R
REPLACEMENT drive, as set on the defective drive.
Refer to HP Service manual for more details.
Note: New hard disks are factory formatted.
They do not need to be reformatted.
Ship the defective unit to the return address mentioned within the
Refer to section 5-5 Send back the defective unit for details
Note: When replacing a defective CPU box, it is recommended to keep
the hard disk drive(s) if operational, in order to avoid having to reload the
software and loose the exams stored on the disks.
For disassembly/reassembly instructions and precautions, Refer to the HP
Service Manual for the workstation.
5-3 Computer box replacement procedures
Note: The initial Z800 workstation running AW VolumeShare5 has been introduced with the X5550 CPU.
From Q1 2012 a new version of the Z800 workstation, featuring a new CPU (X5650) is delivered.
FRUs are available for both versions of the Z800. When ordering a replacement workstation be sure to
order an identical part. See Chapter 4, Renewal Parts, for FRU details.

ITEM DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER BOX When replacing a defective CPU box, it is strongly recommended to keep
REPLACEMENT the hard disk drive(s) if operational, in order to avoid having to reload the
software and loose the exams stored on the disks.
For disassembly/reassembly instructions and precautions, Refer to the HP
HARD DISK DRIVES Service Manual for the workstation.
Disks cage guides may have sharp edges. Take care removing and/or
inserting disks, to avoid injuring hands, and/or wear protection
gloves !!!
COMPUTER BOX When replacing a defective CPU box, it is strongly recommended to keep
REPLACEMENT the NIC Ethernet card if operational, so that application license keys do
not have to be recalculated by the OLC.
ETHERNET CARD For disassembly/reassembly instructions and precautions, Refer to the HP
Service Manual for the workstation.

ITEM DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER BOX FOREWORD

REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE NOTE: Follow the EHS instructions (HP Z800 Workstation Handling
Procedure, part no. 5396249-100), in order to make sure it is handled
safely.
1: Unpack the CPU box carefully, in order not to damage the packaging,
which will have to be used to return the defective unit.
2: Your AW CPU box should at any time be labelled with a rating plate to
mention the CE marking and other Model and Serial numbers.
The FRU computer box is delivered with 3 blank rating plates, instructions
and 1 blank ICD card to be filled up. Store these parts cautiously in a safe
place.
They are necessary for the new Computer Box.
CPU BOX REPLACEMENT

Note: Your Computer Box FRU unit may also be delivered with an extra
Keyboard and a box of accessories.
1 : DO NOT LEAVE on–site the Cdroms and other unnecessary items that
may be contained in the workstation’s FRU package. Some of these
Cdroms, if improperly used by the customer, might lead to software
corruption (see 5–1).
2 : Make sure to write on the spare Rating Plate of the swapped CPU box
the proper information for your site (see section 5-4 Workstation case
labeling) .
Stick the rating plate on the new CPU box.
3 : Fill up the ICD card with the necessary information and send it asap to
the GIB administration, so that the serial number and other appropriate
info of the new CPU box is properly entered in the
Global Installed Base database.
4: If you return the hard disks with the defective unit, you should whenever
possible erase all patient data stored on the disks.
5: Make sure you return the locker key together with the defective
workstation.
Stick it with tape on the CPU back, key holder.
6: Make sure to remove the extra memory option modules before returning
the defective workstation.
7: Carefully pack up the defective CPU box, making sure that NO parts is
missing. In the other case, your region will be charged for the missing
parts.
Note : If an extra keyboard is delivered within the workstation FRU, it can
be kept on–site, and does not need to be returned.
8 : Ship the defective unit to the return address mentioned within the
section 5-5 Send back the defective unit

ITEM DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER BOX NEW CPU BOX CHECKS

REPLACEMENT The AW FRU CPU box you have received may not have the correct BIOS
PROCEDURE CHECKS and proper BIOS settings.
The following items should be checked on the new CPU box:
1: Check Firmware and BIOS. Refer to Job Card TSG012. If necessary
flash Firmware and BIOS, and reconfigure BIOS parameters.
2: Memory Add–on option : Check that you have reinstalled the additional
memory modules from the old CPU box, if applicable.
3: Your new CPU box is delivered with a basic Linux Red Hat loaded from
the HP factory.
If you choose not to reinstall the hard disk drives from the defective unit
into the new unit, you will need to proceed with a complete software reload
L.F.C. (OS and AW software).
Refer to AW IM, Job Card IST011.

5-4 Workstation case labeling

The new workstation case must have Rating Plate, and e-IFU labels affixed. A Z800 workstation must
also have an EHS label due to its weight.
5-4-1 Fill in details of the new CE rating plate
Important! Medical equipment must be accurately labelled in order to comply with international and
local regulations. Make sure to carefully follow the instructions below, in order to properly
label your replacement FRU workstation.
The CE rating plate must be stuck on the workstation’s casing according to the Labeling Guide for the
workstation (For the Z800 this is the Service Note HP Z800 CPU Box Replacement FRU, Part No.
5396250-100.) All details on the rating plate must be carefully completed.
(The example below is a generic label. The actual details will depend on the regional location.) Some
details may be prefilled. If necessary, use a permanent ink pen to complete any missing details on the
rating plate, before sticking it up on the CPU box casing. Complete the following details:
1 : Model number : This number is 5314326-2 for the production XW8600 and 5183547-32 for XW8400.
For the Z800, there are two possible models, depending on the FRU ordered: 5394794-2 for the 4-core
X5550 CPU version, and 5394794-32 for the 6-core X5650 CPU version.
Note: Do not confuse the workstation Model numbers with the corresponding workstation FRU numbers:
5394794-20 or 5394794-30 (the Z800 workstation FRUs respectively) , 5314326-20 (XW8600
workstation FRU) and 5183547-25 (XW8400 workstation FRU). The FRUS do not have AW software
loaded.
2 : Serial number : This number can be found at the rear and on top of the CPU box.
3 : LicenseId number: Open a Command window and type in : licenseId <Enter>
OR
Click Admin / Service Tools / Display Config
The AW License key number, as well as the license keys for the optional applications corresponding to
the LicenseId number of your new workstation, can be resupplied by the OLC.
If necessary, call your OLC with the SO (FDO) and the site’s SystemID number to get new license keys.

• However, in order to save time, it is recommended to retain the NIC Ethernet card from the old
workstation CPU box, and to reinstall it in the new CPU box. In this way you will be able to keep the
existing application license keys.
Switch User to "root" and run the /export/home/sdc/scripts/sys-reconfig script, in order for your
system to reinstall the NIC (additional Network interface card).
• It is also recommended to retain the hard disks from the old workstation CPU box, and to reinstall
them in the new CPU box. In this way you will be able to keep the existing images and/or avoid
reinstalling the software.
Refer to section 5-3 Computer box replacement procedures
You can get information on your workstation’s license keys by connecting to the E–LICENSE site at:
http://egems.gehealthcare.com/elicense/idex.jsp
5-4-2 EHS safety label (Z800 only)
In all cases, the HP Z800 Workstation should already have the following EHS label, due to its weight. It
indicates that handling should conform to safety instructions approved by EHS. If a Z800 does not
already have this label, stick a new one on it, as shown in the labeling diagram below. (This label is not
required on XW8600 or XW8400 workstations.)
5-4-3 e-IFU Label
This label, supplied in the FRU kit, indicates that the workstation is delivered with electronic Instructions
For Use (e-IFU). Electronic documentation can be consulted on PC, and on the AW after installation of
the supplied software package.
The FRU workstation does not yet have an e-IFU label. This is mandatory for regulatory compliance.
Please find the label supplied in the FRU kit and stick it on the case as shown in the labeling diagram
below.
5-4-4 Fill in the new ICD card

You have just swapped your computer box. You must complete the ICD card and send it back to the GIB
organization, in order to have the new CPU box registered in GIB database, and to ensure that the

defective one is uninstalled.

Carefully write down all necessary installation and uninstallation information (Serial Numbers,
System IDs etc ..) of the new and old CPU boxes, and send back the ICD sheets.
The information about the uninstalled CPU box, can be written at the rear of the installation card, if no
uninstallation sheet is available on the ICD card.
5-4-5 Do not leave the following items on site
Case 1 : The FRU CPU box is a new workstation:
It may be delivered with an extra keyboard and a box of accessories.
It is also delivered with new CE rating plates, an ICD card, and a service instructions document.
• Keep the extra keyboard (if applicable) for spare.
• Dispose of all other unnecessary items . DO NOT LEAVE these items ON SITE !!!!
Case 2 : The FRU CPU box is already a repaired workstation.
It is not delivered with a keyboard and a box of accessories.
It is just delivered with new CE rating plates, and an ICD card, and service instructions.
5-5 Send back the defective unit

Send back the defective CPU box, Hard Disk drive or DVD/CD–R drive as follows:
Important! For the Z800, follow the EHS instructions (HP Z800 Workstation Handling Procedure, part no.
5396249-100, or see Appendix 1 of this manual), in order to make sure it is handled safely.
Important! Ensure that NO PART from the defective workstation is unaccounted for, before sending it
back to the address mentioned on the delivery package. Any part unaccounted for will be
charged to the region.
The defective unit (and any other faulty components) must be sent back through the ”SWAP (Supplier
Warranty Program) process”.
Fill in the red label identifying the defective unit with the following information:
• GEMS part number
• Job number
• Failure description :
i.e : Result of HP Diagnostics test summary if appropriate (see Job Card TSG005).
• Workstation Serial number (even for disk drives returned separately)
• FE contact name and ID number
• SWAP/FOI/FOA : Cross Swap Box.
For further details of upgrade and return procedures, including regional return addresses, see the AW
IM, Chapter 4.
5-6 Replacement Network Card

If you need to replace the workstation’s NIC card, refer to the HP Service Manual provided for the
workstation.

On the Z800, the network card should preferably be fitted in expansion slot 5 (counting from the top, see
diagram), to minimize detrimental impact on the graphics card of heat and electrostatic interference from
cables.
recommended slot
for NIC card,
assuming graphics card
in slot 2
The AW workstation’s License ID is is generated as a function of the id for the first NIC card found on the
system. The AW Software key is generated as a function of the License ID. Thus if you replace the NIC
card you will need to obtain a new software key, based on the workstation’s new License ID.
Note: The licenseId command displays the workstation’s license ID. However, after removing or changing
the workstation’s network card, this command produces an error, as the license ID is generated as a
function of the card’s MAC address. To reconfigure the workstation:
1. Write down the station identification (hostname, IP address, netmask and additional Ethernet card
if applicable)
2. Switch user to root.
3. Execute the following command
/bin/rm -f /etc/udev/rules.d/70-persistent-net.rules
4. Run sys-reconfig then shutdown the station
5. Replace the defective NIC card
6. Reboot the workstation and reenter the hostname, IP, etc..
7. Login as sdc . Startup will fail because of invalid software key.
8. Right-click to display the root menu, then open a command window.
9. Use the licenseId command to find the new license ID.
10. Use the eLicense tool to generate new license keys for the workstation (or ask the OLC to do this). You will
need the new license ID to generate the keys.
11. Reconfigure the following software keys: SDC Software key, CCOW license key, SoftSwitch license key,
Floating License Client Access Enabler key, and Advanced Applications license keys.

Renewal Parts
Chapter 4 Renewal Parts

This chapter provides the information necessary to identify Renewal Parts (FRU) of the AW
VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6) product.
• Abbreviations
Note: The initial Z800 workstation running AW VolumeShare5 has been introduced with the 4-core Xeon
X5550 CPU.
From Q1 2012 a new version of the Z800 workstation, featuring a new 6-core CPU (Xeon X5650) is
delivered.
FRUs are available for both versions of the Z800. When ordering a replacement workstation be sure to
order an identical part. See the list given in this chapter.
Chap4_Renewal_Parts AW.fm Page no. 177 Chapter 4

Renewal Parts
Important! In the following tables, some parts are listed with the full part number including extension,
where this will help to discriminate between available alternatives having the same root part
number. Where part number extensions are not listed, typically for software, always order the
latest available revision of the latest available release of the part (for instance 5393400-4).
This information is correct at the time of product launch but will evolve during product lifecyle.
ITEM PART NO. FRU REP DESCRIPTION QTY APP

HP Z800 WORKSTATION
5394794-20 Y Z800 FRU WORKSTATION (4-CORE X5550 CPU) FOR AW 1
(W/O KEYBOARD & W/O MOUSE): Model 5394794-2:
5394794-30 Y Z800 FRU WORKSTATION (6-CORE X5650 CPU) FOR AW 1

(W/O KEYBOARD & W/O MOUSE): Model 5394794-32:
available from Q1 2012
5394794-9 Y 850 Watt Power Supply 1
5394794-5 Y 5.25” SATA DVDRW Multi Drive 1
5394794-6 Y 300GB SAS 15K RPM Disk Drive 3
5314326-7 Y Single Port Gigabit PCI-E Card 1
5394794-10 Y Single 2GB FBD DDR3 ECC DIMM 1
5394794-11 Y Single 4GB FBD DDR3 Registered ECC DIMM 1
5394794-8 Y Nvidia 295NVS PCI-E 256MB Graphics Card 1
5394794-12 Y Rear Chassis Fan Assembly for Z800 1
5394794-13 Y Memory Fan Assembly for z800 1
5394794-14 Y PCI Fan Assembly for z800 1
5394794-15 Y Display Port-to-DVI adapter for NVS295 1
5394794-16 Y Air deflector 1
HP XW8600 WORKSTATION
5314326-20 Y XW8600 FRU WORKSTATION FOR AW (W/O KEYBOARD & 1
W/O MOUSE)
5314326-9 Y 1050 WATT POWER SUPPLY (AW workstation only) 1
5314326-6 Y 5.25” SATA DVDRW MULTI DRIVE 1
5314326-7 Y SINGLE PORT GIGABIT PCI ETHERNET CARD 1
5314326-8 Y NVIDIA NVS290 PCI–E 128MB GRAPHICS CARD 1
5314326-10 Y SINGLE 2GB FBD DDR2–800 DIMM MEMORY MODULE 1
5314326-11 Y REAR CHASSIS/MEMORY FAN ASSEMBLY 1
5314326-12 Y External power switch 1
HP XW8400 WORKSTATION
5183547-25 Y XW8400 FRU WORKSTATION FOR AW (W/O KEYBOARD & 1
W/O MOUSE)
5183547-18 Y 800 WATT POWER SUPPLY 1
5183547-19 Y REAR CHASSIS/MEMORY FAN ASSEMBLY 1
5183547-22 Y 5.25” DVD+/–R/RW/ROM CD–R/RW/ROM DRIVE 1
5183547-23 Y NVIDIA NVS285 PCI–E 128MB (2 X 64MB) GRAPHICS CARD 1
5183547-34 Y NVIDIA NVS285 PCI–E 128MB (NEW REV) GRAPHICS CARD 1
Note: 5183547-23 and 5183547-34 are equivalent.
5183547-24 Y SINGLE PORT GIGABIT PCI ETHERNET CARD 1

5183547-15 Y 73GB SAS 15K RPM DISK DRIVE (Seagate) 2
5183547-51 Y 73GB SAS 15K RPM DISK DRIVE (Fujitsu) 2
Chapter 4 Page no. 178 Chap4_Renewal_Parts AW.fm

Renewal Parts

COMMON ITEMS TO XW8600 / XW8400 WORKSTATIONS
5183547-21 Y 3.5” 1.44MB FLOPPY DISKETTE DRIVE 1

5183547-26 Y 146GB SAS 15K RPM DISK DRIVE (Seagate) 2
5183547-52 Y 146GB SAS 15K RPM DISK DRIVE (Fujitsu) 2
5183547-58 Y 300GB SAS 15K RPM (SEAGATE) DISK DRIVE 2
5183547-16 Y DUAL VGA Y–CABLE ADAPTER FOR NVIDIA NVS CARD 1
5183547-17 Y DUAL DVI Y–CABLE ADAPTER FOR NVIDIA NVS CARD 1
INPUT DEVICES
5314326-4 Y BLACK 3 BUTTONS EMC ENHANCED MOUSE USB 1
5183547-4 Y STANDARD BLACK US ENGLISH USB KEYBOARD 1
5183547–5 Y FRENCH KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
5183547–6 Y ITALIAN KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
5183547–7 Y SPANISH KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
5183547–8 Y GERMAN KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
5183547–9 Y PORTUGUESE KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
5183547–10 Y SWEDISH KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
5183547–11 Y JAPANESE KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
5183547–12 Y KOREAN KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
5183547–13 Y CHINESE KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
5183547–46 Y DANISH KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
5183547–47 Y DUTCH KEYBOARD USB 1
5183547–48 Y NORWEGIAN KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
5183547–49 Y FINNISH KEYBOARD USB (BLACK) 1
MONITORS AND CABLES

5172850–3 Y 19” NEC1990SXI LCD FLAT PANEL COLOR MONITOR 1
5117545–2 Y 19” NEC1980SXI LCD FLAT PANEL COLOR MONITOR 1
5429039 Y EIZO 19 inch LCD Monitor 1
5177284 Y DVI–D TO DVI–D VIDEO CABLE FOR NEC MONITOR 1
2304737–2 Y DVI TO HD15M–VGA VIDEO CABLE FOR NEC MONITOR 1
Parts for AW4.6_04 Software

5393398-2 Y GEHC OS FOR AW4.6 DVD–ROM 1
5393400-4 Y AW4.6_04 SOFTWARE + ON–LINE DOC CDROM 1
5393399-4 Y AW4.6 SERVICE DOCUMENTATION CDROM 1
Z800 DIAGNOSTICS UTILITY

5393401 Y HP HARDWARE DIAGNOSTICS CDROM For Z800 1
BIOS FLASH UTILITY

5393402 Y HP Z800 BIOS FLASH UTILITY CDROM (BIOS 3.07 or higher) 1
5393402-2 Y HP Z800 BIOS FLASH UTILITY CDROM (BIOS 3.19 or higher) 1
5340589 Y HP XW8400 BIOS FLASH UTILITY CDROM (BIOS 2.24c) 1
5340588 Y HP XW8600 BIOS FLASH UTILITY CDROM (BIOS 1.33) 1

Renewal Parts

ADVANCED APPLICATIONS
5392398 Y VOLUME VIEWER APPS, SOFTWARE & DOCS DVDROM 1
FOR AW, release 10.X
5422735 Y VOLUME VIEWER APPS, SOFTWARE & DOCS DVDROM 1
FOR AW, release 11.X
5257416-5 Y Reporting Tool CDROM 1

5393224 Y NeuroMarQ 1.0 SW and Docs CD 1
5393225 Y NeuroMarQ Demo Exams CD 1
5342115-5 Y GSI Viewer SW & Docs for AW 1
5394105 Y AngioViz 1
5428744 Y CardIQ Xpress Process SW and Docs DVD for AW 1
RIS-IC_CCOW / SOFTSWITCH OPTION

5183922–3 Y CCOW CONTEXT MANAGER (WITH FCC) CDROM 1
5405892-2 Y RIS SYNCH ENABLER (RIS-IC/CCOW /SYNERGY) CDROM 1
ETHERNET
5121195 Y CABLE RJ45 CAT5 (4 METERS) 1
ETHERNET CROSS–OVER CABLES

2228811 Y CROSS–OVER CABLE RJ45 CAT5 (1 METER) (3.3 FT) 1
2212538 Y CROSS–OVER CABLE RJ45 CAT5 (4.5 METER) (14.8 FT) 1
2215029–5 Y CROSS–OVER CABLE RJ45 CAT5 (50 METER) (164 FT) 1 1
AC POWER CORDS
5172747-2 Y AW/SA HP WORKSTATION POWER CORDS KIT 1
5161030-2 Y HP Workstation Chinese Power Cord / Keyboad Kit 1
INSITE OPTION
2371128 N RS232 CABLE DB9F/DB25M 1 1
2245794 N GLOBAL MULTITECH MODEM (EUROPE/ASIA/AMERICAS) 1
MEMORY UPGRADE OPTIONS

5183243 Y 4GB Memory Package for HP XW8400 1
5344141 Y 4GB Memory Package for HP XW8600 1
5394797 Y 6GB to 12GB memory upgrade for Z800 1
5394798 Y 6GB to 24GB memory upgrade for Z800 1

Renewal Parts
Hardware - Software compatibility Matrix
AW4.6_02 AW4.6_03 AW4.6_04

(4-CORE X5550 CPU)
Model: 5394794-2

(6-CORE X5650 CPU)
Model: 5394794-32
Important! When reinstalling AW software, it is recommended to use the latest available version.
When ordering software FRUs, always order the latest available version compatible with the
platform.

Renewal Parts

DICOM Filming
Chapter 5 DICOM Filming
1 Interconnection
None. Supported devices are network printers only.
Note: The Print Application Entity title (A.E.T) of AW to be declared to the Dicom printers is PR_<hostname>
and not the Hostname of AW as for Dicom hosts.
i.e.: For an AW whose hostname is adw6 :
• Dicom AET = adw6
• Dicom Print AET = PR_adw6
If necessary, the Print A.E. T of AW can be changed by editing the following file:
/export/home/sdc/app–defaults/dicom_print/dprint.cfg
See Section 3–4 for details.
2 Trouble shooting
2-1 Laser Imager Error Code
(See LASER CAMERA vendor’s documentation).
2-2 Error and Status Messages

• Errors occurring when clicking on the PRINT button:
• Empty film not printed.
• Disk is full.
Please wait that some queued jobs have been printed and retry later.
• Internal input/output error has occurred.
Please retry or clear page.
• Cannot spool job for printing.
Please retry or restart Filmer.
• The following status messages will appear in a window while attempting to print. Correct the
indicated condition and the system will retry automatically.
• SUPPLY MAGAZINE EMPTY
• RECEIVE MAGAZINE FULL
• SUPPLY MAGAZINE MISSING
• RECEIVE MAGAZINE MISSING
• SUPPLY MAGAZINE OPEN
• RECEIVE MAGAZINE OPEN
• TOP COVER OPEN
• The following messages may appear while attempting to print:
• Laser camera has been reserved by another user, or busy. Please wait.
Chap5_Filming_AW.fm Page no. 183 Chapter 5

DICOM Filming
• The following status messages will appear in a window while attempting to print. Correct the
indicated condition and the system will retry automatically.
• Printing paused.
• Laser camera has been reserved by another user.
• Please wait.
2-3 Slow Transfer of Compressed Images
2-3-1 Problem Description
• When images are pushed to AW4.5 with compressed network syntax, then the sender (PACS,
workstation etc.) is getting a CSTORE_FAILURE.
• Images are transferring extremely slow or sometimes not at all.
2-3-2 Workaround 1
• Do not use compression to transfer images to AW.

• If possible, configure the pushing machine in order to send images in uncompressed format towards
AW.
2-3-3 Workaround 2
If this configuration is not possible, disable the compressed DICOM networking support in AW with the
following steps:
Login as "sdc", open a command window from Admin - Command Window menu, and execute the
following:
1. Change to merge64 directory

cd ~sdc/app-defaults/merge64 <Enter>
2. In order to backup the original file execute the following command:

cp dmserver.app dmserver.app.orig < Enter>
3. For giving write access to the file execute:

chmod 777 dmserver.app <Enter>
4. in order to edit the file, use the "gedit" editor, or any other suitable editor to execute:
gedit dmserver.app <Enter>
· at Line 167 of the dmserver.app file, remove the following lines:
[Srv_General_Syntax_List]
SYNTAXES_SUPPORTED =8
Chapter 5 Page no. 184 Chap5_Filming_AW.fm

DICOM Filming
SYNTAX_1 = JPEG_LOSSLESS_HIER_14
SYNTAX_2 = JPEG_2000_LOSSLESS_ONLY
SYNTAX_3 = JPEG_BASELINE
SYNTAX_4 = JPEG_EXTENDED_2_4
SYNTAX_5 = JPEG_2000
SYNTAX_6 = EXPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN
SYNTAX_7 = EXPLICIT_BIG_ENDIAN
SYNTAX_8 = IMPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN
· AND replace it with the following:
[Srv_General_Syntax_List]
SYNTAXES_SUPPORTED =3
SYNTAX_1 = EXPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN
SYNTAX_2 = EXPLICIT_BIG_ENDIAN
SYNTAX_3 = IMPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN
· Save the file from File menu with Save submenu and quit the editor.
5. Set back the file in read-only mode:

chmod 444 dmserver.app <Enter>
6. Reboot the workstation.
3 Checks and utilities

3-1 Communication Checks
Communication from the Advantage Workstation to the Printer can be checked by opening a Command
Window and typing in :
ping <IP address of the printer> <Enter>
i.e : ping 192.3.45.11 <Enter>
3-2 Utility Commands
Click on the Filmer button

DICOM Filming
3-2-1 Before printing is done

The image and associated icon are stored in a ”reserved space” under:
/export/home1/sdc_image_pool/reserved
The ”reserved spaces” are of the form IMSxxxxxx.
In order to know which one of them contains the image(s) candidate to print, type in:
strings .IMS* | more <Enter>
You should find a line like IMSsexzxxxx and filmer.xxxxx. To know what they contain, type in:
cd IMSsexxxxx <Enter>
ls –al<Enter>
You should find ”n” files called dicomImage1 to dicomImageN corresponding to the format selected
(format 4x1 gives 4 lines) and ”n” files called voilut1x to voilut Nx, corresponding to the associated
Lookup tables.
If image save has been selected too, you should find ”n” files called saveImage0 to saveImageN.
Note that these last files are Dicom files and can be directly handled accordingly (moved, copied,
declared into the Database etc.).

DICOM Filming
Note: The ”reserved spaces” are reset at each ” Restart Software” or each Reboot. You can view the exact
image(s) that will be on the film by using the command:
imadump dicomImageX <Enter> where X is the number of the image
To quit, press simultaneously on <CTRL> and <C> keys.
For more information on the imadump utility, (non–square image formats etc...), type:
imadump –h <Enter>
3-2-2 When printing is started
The image is spooled in a ”reserved space” under :
/export/home1/sdc_image_pool/reserved
The ”reserved spaces” are of the form IMSxxxxxx.
In order to know which of them contains the image(s) to print, type in:
strings .IMS* | more <Enter>
Note: If ”n” print jobs have been started and are queued (not printed yet), you will find ”n” reserved spaces
belonging to the PrintManager.
You should find line(s) with PrintManager.xxxxx. To know what they contain, type in:
ls <Enter>
You should find ”n” files called imgXXXXXX. They will remain until they have been printed, even though
the ”Restart software” button is pressed or the workstation rebooted.
You should also find in each PrintManager reserved space a file called <printer_name>.dev in which you
can review the settings and characteristics of the printer(s) declared to your workstation.
To have a chance to see this short–lived information, you must pause printing by clicking on the Filming
Queue button.
To review this file, type in:
more <printer_name>.dev <Enter>
You can view the exact image(s) that will be on the film by using the following commands:
filmdump imgXXXXXX – display <Enter>
where X is the number of the image
To quit, press simultaneously on <CTRL> and <C> keys.
If you don’t want the print to occur, you can delete the dicomImageX files from the /export/home/sdc/
films directory when done with reviewing.
cd /export/home/sdc/film <Enter>
rm dicomImageX <Enter>
Where X is the number of the image
For more information on the filmdump utility, (non–square image formats etc...), type:
filmdump –h <Enter>
Note: You can also find files called imgXXXXXX.ps if they have been created for a postscript printer. In this
case, to review them, use the gv (ghostview) command and you DO NOT need to run the filmdump
command before:

DICOM Filming
i.e.: gv imgXXXXX.ps <Enter>

3-2-3 When printing is done
The ”reserved spaces” that belong to the PrintManager are reset.
3-3 Accessing and using the log file
Note: The logfiles are periodically and automatically cleaned up by the system ”cron” to prevent them from
growing up, consuming disk space.
• Change to the logfiles directory
To read the contents of the prslog, printserverlog, printManagerlog, dicomPrintlog,
FilmComposerProxylog, or lcbuildlog type:
more <logfile_name> <Enter>
i.e : more prslog <Enter>
Note: You can as well use the command display_logfile –f <logfile_name> which packages the file for
easier reading of the older compressed logfiles (i.e.: browserlog.WedSep1715:15:04.Z).
Note: FilmComposerProxylog and lcbuildlog are used to ensure compatibility with the batch Filming of the
Advanced applications such as Volume Viewer, Navigator, etc.
3-4 Changing the Print AET of your AW

If necessary, the default Print A.E. T of AW can be changed by using the "vi" editor or any other suitable
editor, to edit the following file:
vi /export/home/sdc/app–defaults/dicom_print/dprint.cfg [Return]
Uncomment the following line and replace the syntax ”My application entity title” by the name you
want to give instead:
#applicationEntityTitle=”My application entity title”
becomes
applicationEntityTitle=”AWPrintAET” for example
(do not forget the " " and add at the end AET with capital A, E, and T)
Save and quit
<Esc> :wq! <Enter>
3-5 Older DICOM Printers

For former software releases of Sterling Dicom printers (if the result of the print is black & white
reversed) it may be necessary to add the MONOCHROME2 interpretation in order to correct this
issue.
In order to do this, follow the steps:
Login as sdc if not already logged in, and switch user to root:
su – root <Enter>
Password :operator <Enter>
Change to the Prefs directory by typing:

DICOM Filming
cd /export/home/sdc/Prefs <Enter>
Edit the SdCDicomPrintConfig file with the vi editor or any suitable editor and add the following line at the
end of the file:
(make sure to type a capital S, C, D, P and C for this file name)
vi SdCDicomPrintConfig <Enter>
# # Dicom Print SOP Class Attributes Configuration File
## If you want to modify the Film Session, Film Box or Image Box SOP
Classes
# default attributes, you just have to remove the ’#’ character in front of:
## For Film Session : set fs_
# For Film Box : set fb_
# For Image Box : set im_
.......................
# Border denisty (2010,0100)
# BLACK
# WHITE
#set fb_border_density ”BLACK”
# Empty image density (2010,0110)
# BLACK
..........................
# Photometric interpretation (0028,0004)
# RGB
# MONOCHROME1
# MONOCHROME2
#
#set im_photo_interpretation ”MONOCHROME1”
set im_photo_interpretation ”MONOCHROME2” <––– Add this line at the end of the file.
Make sure to type it right (NO # at the begining of the line, NO space between MONOCHROME and 2).
Save and quit.

DICOM Filming

Options - Hardware and Software
Chapter 6 Options - Hardware and Software
1 Foreword
This chapter provides additional information about the hardware and software options available for the
AW4.6 workstation.
Where relevant this includes details of configuration and diagnostics for the hardware options, and
uninstallation procedures for both hardware and software options.
For fuller Installation procedures, see also the AW4.6 Installation Manual.
1-1 SCSI Hardware options

SECTION 2: DICOM MOD drive option
Note: The Dicom MOD SCSI drive option is no longer supported with AW4.6.
1-2 Non SCSI Hardware options

SECTION 3: Second monitor option
SECTION 4: memory add–on option
1-3 Applications (Software options)

SECTION 5-1: Volume Viewer Applications package
SECTION 5-2: Reporting Tool Application package
SECTION 5-3: CT and Fusion Applications package
SECTION 5-4: MR Applications package
SECTION 5-5: X–Ray Applications package
SECTION 5-6: PET and Networking Applications package
SECTION 5-7: Software options package standard installation
1-4 Other options

SECTION 6-1: InSite option
• Always follow the LOTO procedure when servicing an AW workstation. See Chapter 3, section 4-1
LOTO Procedure for Advantage Workstation
chap6_option_AW.fm Page no. 191 Chapter 6

3 DICOM optical disk drive
Note: The Dicom MOD SCSI drive option is no longer supported with VolumeShare 5.
4 Adding a Second Monitor

Supported monitor configurations are:
1FP1 / 2FP1 : 1 or 2 monitor Landscape 1K (NEC 19” LCD color monitor)
4-1 Add 2nd Flat Panel LCD Color Landscape (1L1 >>> 2L1)
Two versions of this procedure are provided:
• for the Z800 workstation
• for older workstations supported by AW4.6: XW8600 and XW8400.
Note: Note that some AW Applications (such as NeuroMarq) require dual monitor configuration.
4-1-1 Z800 Workstation

This procedure applies if the AW4.6 (HP Z800) workstation is supplied with and configured to use a
single monitor, and you wish to add a second monitor. (Normally, new AW4.6 workstations are supplied
with two monitors.)
• Shutdown the AW workstation.
• Using a Display Port-to-DVI adapter, connect the second monitor to the second DisplayPort
(numbered 2) on the graphics card, (see diagram below).
• Place the monitor to the right of the first monitor.
• Reboot the AW workstation
• Login as sdc, open a Command window and switch user to Root :
su – root <Enter>
password : Enter the root password
• Run the monitor installation routine :
/export/home/sdc/install/install.site <Enter>
Choose keyword mon >>>> Choice 2 for 2 monitors configuration
• Reboot workstation and login as sdc to start application.
Chapter 6 Page no. 192 chap6_option_AW.fm

Connect primary monitor here
Connect second
monitor here (port 2)
4-1-2 XW8600 and XW8400 Workstations

This procedure applies for an XW8600 or XW8400 workstation configured to use a single monitor, and to
which you wish to add a second monitor.
• Shutdown the AW workstation.

• Connect the second monitor to the second connector of the Y-adapter(add one if not already
present).
• Connect the Y-adapter to the graphics card, as shown in the diagram below
• Place the second monitor to the right of the primary monitor.
• Reboot the AW workstation
• Login as sdc, open a Command window and switch user to Root :
su – root <Enter>
password : Enter the root password
• Run the monitor installation routine :
Choose keyword mon >>>> Choice 2 for 2 monitors configuration
• Reboot workstation and login as sdc to start application.

4-2 Removing 2nd Monitor From an Installed System

(This may be desirable as a temporary solution, if a monitor installed on another workstation fails, and if
no spare part is available rapidly.)
• You can uninstall the 2nd monitor through the Configuration Menu of the Common Service Desktop
Service Interface (see AW IM, Job Card IST002),
OR
• Open a Command window, switch User to Root and run the monitor installation routine:
Choose keyword mon >>>> Choice 1 for single monitor configuration
• Shutdown workstation and turn it off.
• Physically disconnect the monitor from its power cable and video cable.
• Z800: Disconnect the redundant video cable and Display Port-to-DVI adapter from the workstation
graphics card (the adapter should be the one connected to DisplayPort 2), OR
• XW8600 / XW8400: Disconnect the redundant video cable from the Y adapter.
• Reboot the workstation, before login in again as sdc to .
• Re-use and if necessary order a replacement the monitor.
5 Memory Upgrades
Important! OBSERVE VERY CAREFULLY THE ANTI–STATIC PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING THE MEMORY
MODULES.
• Shutdown the workstation and turn it off. Disconnect all cables and open the side cover.

• Use an antistatic wrist wrap and antistatic mat to handle the printed circuit boards.
5-1 Z800 Workstation

New Z800 systems are fitted with 6Gb memory (3 x 2Gb modules). Some Advanced Applications require
a memory upgrade and are provided with the appropriate DIMMs (memory explansion modules).
There are three supported configurations: 6, 12 and 24Gb.
• To upgrade from 6 to 12Gb, you will receive a 6Gb Memory Package. Fit the three x Single 2GB FBD
DDR3 ECC DIMMs into the three empty slots between DIMM 1 and DIMM 6 (assuming that the
workstation already has the base configuration).
• To upgrade to 24Gb, you will receive a 24Gb Memory Package. Remove all currently fitted memory,
then fit the six x Single 4GB FBD DDR3 ECC DIMMs into DIMM slots 1 - 6.
Refer to the HP Z800 Service Manual, chapter 5, pages 158-161, for further information.
5-2 XW8400 Workstation

Refer also to the HP XW8400 Service Manual, chapter 4, page 66–68, for more detailed information.
Important! DO NOT USE OUTSOURCED MEMORY MODULES THAT COULD LEAD TO MALFUNCTION OF YOUR
WORKSTATION.
Maximum memory configuration supported is 12 GBytes (4GB standard + 2 x 6GB add–on)
• Basic memory is made of 4 x 1GB modules (prior to January 2008).
Note: From January 2008, new XW8400 stations for AW were delivered with 2 x 2GB modules (slots 1 and 3)
instead of the 4 x 1GB modules basic memory (slots 1, 3, 5 and 7). However, new XW8400 stations for
SA were still delivered with 2 x 1GB modules basic memory.
• Optional memory ”Add–on” use sets of 2GB modules .

You must install the memory modules in valid configurations:

• If using only one DIMM (for test purposes), install it in slot 1.
Otherwise, DIMM memory modules must be installed in pairs.
Each pair must be composed of equivalent capacity modules (i.e : 2x 1GB).
If using two DIMMs, install them in slots 1 and 3 (standard 2 x 1GB Seno Adv. configuration or new
standard 2 x 2GB AW configuration from January 2008)
• If using four DIMMs, install them in slots 1, 3, 5 and 7 (standard 4 x 1GB AW configuration)
• If using six DIMMs, install them in slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7
• If using eight DIMMs, install them in all slots.
Install the memory module pairs in order of size, from smallest to largest.
Note: Standard memory configuration is from January 2008, made of 2 x 2GB memory modules, inserted
into slots 1 and 3, instead of 4 x 1GB modules.
The BIOS generates warnings/errors on invalid memory configurations.
Refer to HP XW8400 Service Manual for diagnostic codes and error beeps meanings.
5-3 XW8600 Workstation

Refer also to the HP XW8600 Service Manual, chapter 4, page 79–82, for more detailed information.
WORKSTATION.
Maximum memory configuration supported is 16GBytes (4GB standard + 3 x 4GB Memory Package

add–on (each contains 2 x 2GB modules)

• Basic memory is made of 2 x 2GB modules.
• Optional memory ”Add–on” use sets of 2GB modules .
Required system board DIMM installation order

Use the figure above as a guide for installing memory:
• If installing only one DIMM (for test purpose), install it in socket 1.
• If installing two DIMMs (basic configuration), install them in socket pair: 1/5.
• If installing four DIMMs, install them in socket pairs: 1/3 and 5/7.
• If installing six DIMMs, install them in socket pairs: 1/3, 5/7, and 2/4.
• If installing eight DIMMS, install them in socket pairs: 1/3, 5/7, 2/4, and 6/8.
Each pair must be matched in rank, DRAM technology, speed, and capacity.
Important! If adding DIMMs to a system that originally contained only two DIMMs, move the DIMM from
socket five to socket three to maintain proper pairing.
Note: For best performance, load the largest DIMM pairs in the black slots.
WORKSTATION.

6 Advanced Applications (Software Options)
Note: To check which Advanced Applications releases are currently supported by AW4.6, refer to Chapter 4
of this manual, FRU list, and use the Applications Compatibility Checker utility.
See Job Card PM004.
6-1 Volume Viewer applications package

To install the Application(s), refer to the AW IM, Job Card IST005 and to the on-line manual (if applicable)
delivered with the Application(s).
To uninstall the Application(s), refer to Job Card IST005 and to the on-line manual (if applicable)
delivered with the Application(s).
Applications supported within the Volume Viewer package are protected by a License key.
6-2 Reporting Tool package

To install the option, refer to the AW IM, Job Card, IST005 and to the on-line manual delivered with the
option.
To install the Application(s), refer to the AW IM, Job Card IST005 and/or to the on-line manual (if
applicable) delivered with the Application(s).
To uninstall the Application(s), refer to the AW IM, Job Card IST005 and to the on-line manual (if
Reporting Tool Application is protected by a License key.
6-3 CT and Fusion Applications - Collector DVD Package

These applications are grouped on one DVD, and are delivered with VolumeShare 5 Upgrade Kits.
To install the Application(s), refer to the AW IM, Job Card IST005 and/or to the on-line manual (if
Applications supported within the CT and Fusion package are are protected by a License key.
6-4 MR Applications - Collector DVD package

To install the Application(s), refer to the AW IM, Job Card IST005 and to the on-line manual (if
Applications supported within the MR package are protected by a License key.
6-5 X–ray Applications - Collector DVD Package


6-6 PET and Networking Applications - DVD Collector Package

Applications supported within the PET and Networking package are protected by a License key.
6-7 Other Applications packages

These applications are grouped on one DVD, and are delivered withVolumeShare 5 Upgrade Kits.
Applications supported within the PET and Networking package are protected by a License key.
OR
follow the steps described below:
• Login as sdc if not already logged in as sdc:
Note: DO NOT SWITCH USER TO ROOT.

• Change to the install directory by typing:
cd /export/home/sdc/install <Enter>
• Run the option software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.”option–name” <Enter>
7 Other options
7-1 Insite option
Important! REFER TO AW IM, JOB CARD IST008 FOR INSTALLATION AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS.


Networking
Chapter 7 Networking
1 Network configuration samples
Z800/
In order to get information on the Ethernet Interface(s):

• Open a Command Window and type :
ifconfig –a <Enter>
1-1 Basic Hospital (Dicom) Network
chap7_Networking_AW.fm Page no. 201 Chapter 7

Networking
1-2 Basic Hospital (Dicom) Network with "AW Server"
AW4.6
1-3 Older Network configurations

1-3-1 Basic Network (no hospital network available)
1-3-2 Basic Intra–Suite Network: MR SIGNA ADVANTAGE, MR HORIZON
Chapter 7 Page no. 202 chap7_Networking_AW.fm

Networking
1-3-3 Basic Intra–Suite Network: CT–HLA, CT–HSA
1-3-4 Basic Network: CT SYTEC, PACE, PROSPEED – MR VECTRA
1-3-5 Basic Network: DRS, DLX (without Digital Gateway)

Networking
1-3-6 Basic Workstations Network with no Router

DLX with a Fast Ethernet Gateway
Note: *: The Fast Ethernet Interface can operate at either 10 or 100 Mbits/s (auto configured).
Note: **: The Digital Gateway MII connector can be used with a MII to AUI Interface and one AUI transceiver.
In this case, the RJ45 cable must be removed.
Note: ***: The Digital Gateway RJ45 connector can be used to connect to a HUB. In this case, the twisted
pair cable is not crossed.

Networking
1-3-7 Workstations Subnetworks with one Router

DLX with a Digital Gateway and a Fast Ethernet Interface

Networking
1-3-8 Advantage Workstation within the MR SUITE

Networking
1-3-9 Advantage Workstation within the CT SUITE
1-3-10 Advantage Workstation on the LOCAL BACKBONE

(Gateway in CT Operator Console)

Networking
1-3-11 Advantage Workstation within the MR, CT and LOCAL SUITE

Networking
1-3-12 MIXED Sources Configuration Sample
2 AW host declaration on the image sources

2-1 AW4.6 Declaration on Unix / Linux Based Source
• PET Discovery ST / STE / 600 / 900
• CT Lightspeed ; CT Brightspeed ; CT 750 HD ; CT/e ; CT/e Dual ; CT/i ; CT Synergy
• Signa HD ; Signa HDX ; MR Signa LX ; MR Excite ; MR 750 ; MR HFO ; MR Profile ; MR Contour
• AW4.X workstations ; AW Server
• Innova DL
Use the Dicom 3.0 protocol.
The DICOM ”Port Number” of the Advantage workstation is ALWAYS ”4006”.
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual that were shipped with the respective products.
2-2 AW4.6 Declaration on GENESIS Based Source

• Signa Advantage 5.x ; Signa Horizon
• CT HSA ; CT HLA ; Genesis IC (Independent console)
The DICOM ”Port Number” of the Advantage workstation is ALWAYS ”4006”.
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual that were shipped with the respective products.

Networking
2-3 AW4.6 Declaration on non Genesis Based Source
Note: Dicom connection is not directly supported with Signa 4.X.
2-4 AW4.6 Host Declaration on CT9800 Image Sources
Note: No IDLink2 version 2.3 DICOM compatible version currently exists.

An IDLink2 compatible system is required to interconnect a CT9800 to Advantage Workstation. Use
of a compatible ”MERGE box” is under identification.
The ”Logical Address” is the hostname of the Advantage workstation (e.g. AW01–PC0).
Note: The ”logical address” is the same thing than ”Application Entity Title” in DICOM format. The ”Host
Address” is the Internet address of the AW (e.g. 192.100.10.4).
The ID/Net2 or DICOM ”Port Number” of the Advantage workstation is ALWAYS ”4006”.
2-5 AW4.6 Host Declaration on "Third Party" Dicom Devices

• Use the DICOM protocol to declare GE XRay DLX or DRS systems and Foreign DICOM hosts.
The DICOM ”Application Entity Title” for the Advantage workstation is the workstation’s hostname
(e.g. AW01–PC0).
The DICOM or ID/Net2 ”Port Number” of the Advantage workstation is ALWAYS ”4006”.
2-6 AW4.6 Declaration on DRS / DLX Sources

• Check that the 64MB memory is recognized by the DLX system, once the Dicom Ethernet interface
has been installed.
• IP addresses should be supplied by the hospital Network Administrator (if applicable). If not, contact
your On–Line support center which can supply a set of unique IP addresses for your network.
Example of IP addresses and Hostnames:
AW1 192.100.1.1 (class C network) - DLX–DICOM1 192.100.1.2 (class C network)
Note: In this basic network case, with no router, and using Class C IP addresses, the Netmask value is
255.255.255.0. In case of non Class C addresses, refer to section 3 for netmask setting.
• DLX setting: Refer to DLX Service Manual, Job Card IST 160 ”Installing the Dicom Ethernet option”,
to set the IP address and Netmask of the DLX and to set the AW Dicom Server in the DLX.
Note: When replacing an existing AW station by another one, you must reboot the DLX, even if you keep the
same hostname and IP address for the new workstation.

Networking
2-7 AW4.6 Declaration on YMS Sources

- CT Sytec family (SRi, S, Plus, 1800i, 3000, ...)
- CT Prospeed family (Plus, Vx, Advantage, S, Sx, ....)
- MR Vectra
After making sure that all hardware and software pieces have been correctly installed, (rev. level of
software compatible with the Ethernet link option, switch settings of the ETC board, removal of the
back plane jumpers at the corresponding slot, etc...), you have to:
• Set the boot FD in the drive and start maintenance utility (if applicable).
• Select installation parameters (change parameters) from the menu.
• Declare the link as shown after (Communication data setting procedure) and reset the scanning
system.
Refer to the CT or MR specific manual for more accurate information as new releases of software on
the Scanning system, may introduce some changes in the procedure.
Note: DICOM format is now implemented on new YMS systems (Prospeed family) depending on the software
version.
Note: The query / retrieve function is available from Advantage Workstation, as YMS systems are query /
retrieve provider (depending on the software version).
Note: For YMS CT, DICOM feature is working ONLY IF

– No image on studies 0
– No SMPTE test pattern installed
Note: When using the DICOM protocol, the Name field to enter, (Application Entity Title) is the hostname of
the Advantage Workstation. So, make sure to enter it EXACTLY the way it’s written on the AW side
(lower or upper case letters) and DO NOT USE any space characters which could be interpreted as 2
different names.
2-7-1 Communication data setting procedure
The following is only applicable for software revision levels FROM:
- SYTEC 3000/p V 6.00
- SYTEC 3000s V 4.00
- PROSPEED V 4.00
- SYTEC i V 3.00
- VECTRA V 3.00

Networking
The following example details the steps to declare the link between an MR Vectra and 2 Advantage
Workstations.
• Activate management by pressing <MGT> key.
• Select “COMMUNICATION DATA HANDLING” from the menu. The system prompts you as
follows.
Note: This procedure, describing the steps to set a MR VECTRA for ethernet communication with Advantage
Workstation, is applicable to the YMS scanning systems mentioned above. The host name must be set
in the form ”SuiteIDHostID”, SuiteID being MR01 and HostID being OC0 in our example.
The Network Address can be left at the default value if there is only one YMS system on the
network. Otherwise, increment it for the second YMS scanner.
The IP address can be set to a Class C default value, as shown in our example,
(190.100.9.X) unless otherwise specified by the Network Administrator of the Site.
Enter Satellite No =
<0: Myself, N: New Data, <END>: Update, <CANC>: Quit>
• First select 0: (Myself) and set parameters to:
<0: Myself, N: New Data, <END>: Update, <CANC>: QUIT>
• Select N: (New Data) to declare a 1st target destination and set parameters to:

Networking
GW Address (GATEWAY) must be left to 0.0.0.0 unless otherwise specified by the Network
Administrator of the Site.
• select N: (New Data) to declare a 2nd target destination and set parameters to:
• Press <END> to update, then <END> to quit the Communication Data Handling menu and RESET
SYSTEM to validate new Hosts declaration.

Networking
3 Networking overview
3-1 General Overview
3-1-1 Class A network
Class A network address between 1 and 127.

Maximum of 127 class A networks and 16777215 hosts per network.
typical netmask (no mask) is 255.0.0.0.
i.e : 3 . 45 . 16. 101
where 3 represents the network and 45.16.101 represents the host id
Network address 3.0.0.0
3-1-2 Class B network
Class B network address between 128 and 191.

(16 bits for the Network, 16 bits for the host).
i.e : 129 . 32 . 100 . 54
where 129.32 represents the network and 100.54 represents the host id
Network address 129.32.0.0
3-1-3 Class C network
Class C network address between 192 and 254

(24 bits for the Network, 8 bits for the host)
i.e : 200 . 44 . 100 . 25
where 200.44.100 represents the network and 25 represents the host id
Most commonly used for CT/MR Advantage Networks and small “Local Area Networks”. (A lot of
possible networks but only a few hosts per network).

Networking
3-2 Modifying Routers and Gateways

If you get the message ’Network unreachable’ when pinging a host, you may need to create a new route
to the host network.
The recommended method to install, uninstall or modify a router, or gateway, is to use the Routers
Management configuration tool available from the Configuration menu on the Common Service
Desktop. Refer to AW IM, Job Card IST002, Routers Management section.
Note: If a Default Gateway has been created, you must delete it before you can create a new one or modify
an existing one.
In the case of a serious networking problem, such as a corrupted router table or if the Common Service
Desktop becomes inoperable, you can launch the yast2 utilities from the command line, then select
Network Services. Use this tool to correct details of routers and gateways. Use with caution, it is possible
to corrupt network card settings with this tool.
3-3 More information on subnetworks

Subnetworks allow a single network address to span several physical networks.
Some of the bits in the host portion of an IP address are used to specify the subnet number on the
network backbone, and the remaining are used to specify the host number within the subnet. How these
bits are divided between subnet and host depends on the type of netmask used.
• The 0–bit netmask (255.255.255.0) is the default netmask for Class C networks, since it has no effect
on the IP address.
• The 7–bit and 8–bit netmasks are useless because they don’t contain any useable host addresses.
Of the remaining netmasks types, the 3–bit, 4–bit, and 5–bit types are the most practical to use because
they offer realistic subnet/host combinations.
Possible Netmasks for Class C Network
To determine which netmask type to use, you must first know which subnet/host combination is needed

Networking
for the network.

When looking at the table, you can notice that the number of useable host addresses is always equal
to the number of host addresses minus 2.
e.g.: 8 >>6 useable; 16 >>14 useable ; 64 >>62 useable host addresses.
If, for instance, we consider a 255.255.255.192 netmask, we can see that we are able to split the
network into 4 subnetworks.
Each subnet will have 62 possible addresses.
–subnet 1: from 1 to 62
The missing addresses are reserved for SRI–NIC administration and subnet broadcasting.
See the following illustration example.
Note: For Class A or Class B subnetworks, consult the Network Administrator of the Site.
3-4 Netmask Declaration

Use the ”sys–reconfig” utility that allows you to change hostname, IP address and netmask. Refer to
Chapter 1 Basic Tools and Procedures for details.

Planned Maintenance
Chapter 8 Planned Maintenance

This chapter contains recommended planned maintenance tasks for the AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6)
workstation. The corresponding Job Cards and manuals which are necessary are indicated.
• Always follow the LOTO procedure when servicing an AW workstation. See Chapter 3, section 4-1
LOTO Procedure for Advantage Workstation.
Chap8_PM_AW.fm Page no. 217 Chapter 8

Planned Maintenance
Chapter 8 Page no. 218 Chap8_PM_AW.fm

Scenario PM000 - Planned Maintenance - Job Card Summary
The key recommended procedures for planned maintenance of the AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6)
workstation are listed below, together with suggested frequency. The corresponding Job Cards are
indicated.
1 Job Cards list
Task Title Job Card Interval

(months)
• Clean workstation, monitors, keyboard and Job Card PM001 - Clean and Check 12
mouse. Workstation and Peripherals.
• Check the external cables
• Backup the Site Parameters Job Card PM002 - Site Parameters Back-Up 12
• Upload Configuration to AWCTT website and GIB Checks
• Check that workstation is properly declared
in the IB database.
• Check the DICOM Printer(s). Job Card PM003 - DICOM Printer Check. 12
• Run HP Diagnostics software on the Job Card TSG005 - Using HP Diagnostics Every site
workstation. Tool visit
• Check workstation logfiles Job Card PM004 - Filesystem checks - 12

• Remove Core and Log Files from Applications Compatibility Checks - GERU (or remotely
Workstation Disk. Update Checks as often as
• Check the compatibility of the Applications possible)
installed.
• Check for GE Remote Update candidates
for installation.
• Proceed with System battery replacement Job Card PM005 - System Battery 36 to 48
Replacement
• Check the correct adjustment of the Job Card PM006 - Color Landscape 12
monitor(s) Monitors - Adjustment Check
pm000_AW.fm Page no. 219

2 Preventive actions checklist

When done with performing the steps described in the PM Job Cards, print out and fill up the following
checklist, and place it the Site’s maintenance logbook.
You may directly fill up one of the checklists attached and leave it in the Service Manual.
Page no. 220 pm000_AW.fm



Job Card PM001 - Clean and Check Workstation and Peripherals
1 Applicability
It is important that monitors used for viewing images are kept clean and free of fingerprints, dust, etc.
These instructions are applicable to LCD monitors only.
2 Supplies
• See procedure below.
3 Tools
• None.
Note: Shutdown the workstation, its monitors and any other attached devices before cleaning. See chapter
1, section 2 for details of software shutdown procedures if needed.
5 Prerequisites
• None
6 Procedure
6-1 Cleaning monitors
Use a microfiber cloth to clean the monitor screen and housing. If necessary, moisten the cloth with
either clean water or ethyl alcohol (up to 96%). Do not allow any drops of cleaning liquid to remain on the
surface; extended contact may cause discoloration of the surface.
Important! Do not use isopropyl ("rubbing") alcohol.

Do not use cleaning agents which attack the surface, such as petroleum (mineral) spirits.
The front panel is extremely sensitive to mechanical damage. Avoid scratches, knocks, etc.
Do not apply the cleaning liquid directly to the monitor housing or screen.
Do not allow the cleaning liquid to enter the monitor housing; be sure to dampen the cloth
sparingly.
Do NOT use:
- Alcohol/solvents at higher concentration > 5%
- Strong alkalis lye, strong solvents
- Acid
- Detergents with fluoride
- Detergents with ammonia
- Detergents with abrasives
- Steel wool
- Sponge with abrasives

- Steel blades
- Cloth with steel thread
6-2 Keyboard and mouse cleaning

Clean the mouse and the keyboard, using appropriate cleaning solution, or isopropyl ("rubbing") alcohol.
6-3 Workstation cleaning procedure

Open the CPU box by referring to the HP Service Manual for the relevant workstation.
Clean inside as necessary. Use an appropriate DATA VACUUM CLEANER such as
46–194427P392.
Important! Pay special note to the Electrostatic Discharge precautions when working inside the CPU box.
Carefully vacuum out the system, carefully attending to heavy accumulation spots such as the
Processor area.
Note: The use of compressed air is not recommended. Blowing dust out with a stream of air is not
recommended because of the ESD (Electro–Static Discharge) hazards to components, and the dust
hazard to the personnel in the area near the cleaning activity.
6-4 Cables - visual checks

Verify the integrity of the power cable and any external cable connections to the peripheral devices,
including the network connections.

Job Card PM002 - Site Parameters Back-Up and GIB Checks
1 Supplies
• One blank CD-ROM or one erased rewritable CD-ROM for Site Parameters Back-up.
2 Tools
• None.
• None.
4 Prerequisites
• None.
5 procedure
5-1 Site Parameters Back-up on a CD-ROM
1. Login as sdc:
<hostname> console login: sdc <ENTER>
Password: adw4.6 <ENTER>
2. Wait for the BROWSER window to pop up.
3. Click Admin. button: Items Display Configuration and Save Configuration are used as follows:
Display Configuration allows you to display on screen all the installed Options protection keys and
the Hosts files.
Save Configuration allows you to save on a blank CD-ROM all the installed Options protection keys
and the Hosts files to simplify a future reinstallation.
Select Save Configuration at this time.
The Save Configuration on CD-ROM window pops up.

Please enter the administrator’s password: administ <ENTER>

Users to backup: sdc user1 user2 user3 usern<ENTER>
backup of sdc...
backup of user1...
.............
backup of usern...
..........................
Saving of internal database flags...
*** info: internal flags have been saved
Please insert a blank CD in the cd writer, and press ENTER <ENTER>
Creating CD-ROM iso image...
Writing the cd...
Checking the CD-ROM content...
backup finished. Press ENTER <ENTER>
4. Label the CD-ROM: Site parameters + hostname + date.
5-2 Site Parameters Restore from a CD-ROM

To restore the parameters from the Configuration CD-ROM, proceed as follows:
1. Click the Admin. button, then select AW Administration.
2. Enter the Administrator’s password.
3. From the Main Menu, type 1 <ENTER> to enter the User Management submenu:
USERS MANAGEMENT
display the list of users.............................. 11
add a user................................................. 12
remove a user........................................... 13
rename a user........................................... 14
set a user password.................................. 15
restore users from a config CD-ROM........ 16
=================================================================
Enter your choice or <Enter> to display the current menu [?,q] 16 <ENTER>
Please insert the backup CD-ROM and press ENTER <ENTER>
-- List of users on CD-ROM
user1
........
usern
Please enter the name of the user to restore (or ’no user’ to finish): user1 <ENTER>
restoring password for user user1 ...
restoring user user1 ...
5-3 GIB Declaration Check

• Check that your system is properly declared in the GIB database, especially if you have already
previously replaced the CPU box by a FRU workstation.
5-4 Upload Configuration to AWCTT website

As part of regular maintenance, the workstation configuration file should be validated and uploaded to
the CTT website.

From the AWCTT website http://awcct.health.ge.com download the FMI (Field Modification Instruction)
Document 80126.
Follow the instructions in the above document

• to download the AW Configuration Analyzer Tool (AWCAT) tool,
• to perform an analysis of the AW workstation configuration, and
• to upload the configuration to the AWCAT site.


Job Card PM003 - DICOM Printer Check
1 Supplies
• None
2 Tools
• None
• None
4 Prerequisites
• None
5 procedure
• Login as sdc
<hostname> console login: sdc <ENTER>
Password: adw4.6 <ENTER>
Wait for the BROWSER window to pop up.
5-1 DICOM Printer adjustments and checks

• Install the SMPTE pattern (together with the Test_pattern pattern):
- From the Admin. menu select Install SMPTE. This takes a few seconds to appear in the Browser
window.
Illustration 1 Admin menu
• Select the Test_pattern pattern from the Browser menu.

- Open the VIEWER by clicking the Viewer button of the Browser.
- Put the Printing Pattern image in the Viewer using Drag and Drop.
- Click the PRINT button and select Print Manager.
- In the Print Manger window, select the right DICOM printer and click Edit Properties.
- In the Properties window, select blue film, processor and portrait. Then Save and Quit.

- Select the printing test pattern by clicking in the image and then click the PRINT button and select
Print image.
- The image is sent to the printer. You can now check the Image Quality.
Important! Make sure that the Test Pattern is displayed with WW =1500 and WL = 2000 for image quality
tests.
• Image Quality on film tests
- Verify the white diagonal lines continuity. Check that they are not showing any steps. [1]
Illustration 2 Test pattern
Step
1 12
2 13
3 14
4
15
[7] 5
16 [7]
[1] 6
17
7
18
8 19
[2] 9
20
10 21
11
[4]
[6]
[3]
[5]
- In the 2 white squares, make sure that the vertical and horizontal lines are well separate for good
resolution. [2]
- In the big white square, check that the arc is not duplicated (must be unique). [3]
- The small black square (within the bigger light grey) must not be surrounded by a white line. [4]
The small white square (within the bigger light grey) must not be surrounded by a black line. [6]

Job Card PM004 - Filesystem checks - Applications Compatibility Checks - GERU Update Checks
Job Card PM004 - Filesystem checks - Applications Compatibility Checks -

GERU Update Checks
These instructions are applicable for the Z800, XW8600 and XW8400 workstations running AW4.6.
1 Filesystem Checks
1-1 Objective
• To ensure the workstation is in optimal working order.
1-2 Tools required

• none
1-3 Procedure
• Open a Command Window and switch User to root:
root <Enter>
password: operator <Enter>
1-3-1 Check for disk usage and available disk space for the FileSystem partitions
For more information, refer to Job Card TSG003 for details
• Check for disk usage and available disk space for the FileSystem partitions.
- Consult the Partitions section of the System Health Page (Admin.Service Tools),
- OR enter the following at the command prompt:
df –k <Enter>
Verify that / and /export/home filesystems ARE NOT, in any case, close to 100% maximum disk
usage, in order to allow System to write data in these partitions.
1-3-2 Check for any unwanted ”core” file, which could take unnecessary disk space.
• find unnecessary CORE files
find / –name core –type f –print <Enter>
• If any core files found, remove them
rm <directory_name>/core <Enter>
TIP: You can also use the Disk Content utility, available from the Diagnostics \ System menu of the
Service Desktop, and the the Health Page utility, available on the Service Desktop Home Page.
Important! Do not attempt to delete any files without seeking advice from the OLC.
Important! DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE CORE DIRECTORY UNDER /export/home/sdc.
1-3-3 Check for big ”logfiles” file, which could take unnecessary disk space.
• Check and delete older LOGFILES which can take disk space

ls <Enter>
If you see files like the following:
browserlog*
browserlog.FriAug906:15:01.Z
You can DELETE ALL *.Z FILES by the following command:
\rm *.Z <Enter>
Note: Using "\" before the command ”rm” allows you not to have to reply to confirmation questions, but
should be used with caution, making sure to be in the appropriate directory.
Note: The system periodically cleanups the older compressed logfiles automatically.
TIP: To identify large files you can also use the Disk Content utility, available from the Diagnostics \
System menu of the Common Service Desktop.
Important! Do not attempt to delete any files without consulting the OLC.
1-3-4 HP Vision Diagnostics / Insight Diagnostics utility

• Run the HP Diagnostics utility supplied with the workstation, in order to monitor system performance
and identify faulty devices. For more information, refer to Job Card TSG005 of this manual
Note: Run the diagnostics program during lunchtime, for example, to save time. The tests must pass without
errors.
1-3-5 Shutdown the workstation

Shutdown of the Advantage Workstation cleans up the ” /tmp ” directory automatically.
Warn the Customer to do this regularly, to keep good performances, and in any case before a
scheduled Main power shutdown.
2 Applications Compatibility Checks
Note: The Compatibility matrix is not available at the time of AW4.6 product introduction. Do not use the
Compatibility Checker until a service update is announced or a new matrix is uploaded on the AW-IB
web site.
2-1 Objective
• To ensure optimal working conditions of the Applications.
2-2 Tools required

• One USB key (or USB hard disk)

2-3 Procedure
Check the compatibility of the Applications installed on your workstation as often as possible.
Use the Applications Compatibility tool, which is designed to compare the release of the Applications
installed with a compatibility matrix that you can download and install on your workstation.
• Start the Common Service Desktop: Click Admin/service Tools
• Click to select the Utilities
• Click on ASTP to select the Advanced Service Tools.

• Click on Compatibility Checker to select the Applications Compatibility checker.
You will be prompted to enter the "root" password. Default "root" password is operator.
The main Compatibility Checker screen lets you choose to either:

• Upload a new Compatibility matrix (normally the Compatibility matrix must be less than 3 months old
to be considered as valid, or
• View/check the compatibility of the Applications installed versus the current loaded Compatibility
matrix. In this case:
• Select from which media (USB key or Hard disk) you will upload the new Compatibility matrix and
follow the instructions from the screen.
i.e: You have stored the Compatibility matrix is on the LICENSES USB key. Proceed as follows:

• Insert your USB key containing the Applications Compatibility matrix "appcompat.xml" file, allow a
few seconds so the USB key is automounted and Select USB.
You will be prompted to select the USB device (if other USB devices are connected), the file you
want to load (click Select File), then click on Browse to select the file.
• The appcompat.xml file is under Filesystem/Media/LICENSES (volume name of the USB key).
Select it and click on Open. Finally, click on OK to load the file. The "Compatibility matrix
successfully loaded" message will pop-up
Note: The Applications Compatibility matrix is regularly updated and posted to the AW-IB Web site
@ http://aw-ib.euro.med.ge.com/.
You can download regularly the matrix to your PC, then to your USB key, and transfer it to the AW
workstation, in order to ensure that the Applications running on your site are up to date.
Additionnaly, this can be done remotely by ftp’ing through ISD the matrix to the AW workstation and
select "load from hard disk" .
• When your new Applications Compatibility matrix is loaded, you can check the compatibility of the
Applications installed on your AW.
Return to the main menu, then click on the View compat results button.
• The following menu screen displays.:
Note: If the compatibility matrix currently loaded on your AW workstation is older than 3 months, the
Compatibility checker tool will not display any results.
1. Green color display
• Appropriate version: Your application version is up to date.

• New version exists: Your application is valid, but a more recent version exists. It can be available
either through an on-request FMI or as a spare part.
2. White color display
• Unknown version: The Application is most probably an evaluation version so it is unregistered.
unless your site is currently under Clinical evaluation, please contact your OLC to find out what
registered version shall be installed instead.
In case of a doubt, please contact your OLC.
• Unknown AW platform version: The AW platform release may be new.
3. Orange color display
• Unsupported version: This version is no longer supported and will be replaced as soon as
possible. It can be available either through an a mandatory FMI or as a spare part.
In case of a doubt, please contact your OLC.
4. Red color display
• Upgrade mandatory: This version must be replaced without delay. It may probably be impacted
by a serious issue. It can be available either through a mandatory and/or safety FMI or as a spare
part.
If in doubt, please contact your OLC.
Note: The USB key is automatically mounted when reading, then unmounted when read is complete.
So you can extract the USB key with no risk when the matrix is uploaded.
3 GE Remote Update Checks

The GE Remote Update feature is setup automatically on the workstation. It will be operational after the
first InSite checkout has occurred, unless you have been asked by your customer to deselect it.
Regularly check if there any software update files have been downloaded to the workstation. These files
then need to be installed to complete the corresponding updates. To do this, refer to Job Card TSG011
section 5 GE Remote Update - Client Configuration.


Job Card PM005 - System Battery Replacement
1 Applicability
These instructions apply to the HP Z800, XW8600 and XW8400 workstations.
This replacement should be done preventively every 3 to 4 years.
2 Procedure
2-1 Objective
• To ensure optimal working conditions of the computer.
2-2 Tools required

• none
2-3 Procedure
The System board integrated battery has a limited life of about 3 to 4 years.
When the battery fails, the workstation repeatedly looses all its configuration settings.
Replace the battery with a CR2032 (coin-type) manganese/lithium battery, available from most
computer accessory stores or photo shops.
2-3-1 Z800
To replace the battery, refer to Z800 Maintenance and Service Manual, part no. 5396251–100, chapter 5.
page 210.
When this is done, you must enter the BIOS and run the Setup program to check BIOS configuration
of the workstation.
2-3-2 XW8600
To replace the battery, refer to XW8600 Service Manual, part no. 5308736–100, chapter 4. page 97.
of the workstation.
2-3-3 XW8400
To replace the battery, refer to XW8400 Service Manual, part no. 5180567–100, chapter 4. page 76.
of the workstation.


Job Card PM006 - Color Landscape Monitors - Adjustment Check
1 Applicability
This procedure explains how to correctly adjust the AW LCD monitors.
(No calibration is required for the NEC LCD color monitors.)
2 Viewing Conditions Check and Setting

2-1 Objective
• To ensure optimal viewing conditions.
2-2 Tools required

• none
2-3 Procedure
• Display the SMPTE pattern from the User Interface Browser.
If the SPMTE pattern is not directly available from the Patient’s list, you may install from the Admin/
Install SMPTE buttons.
• Check the monitor(s) alignment. See ”Console Monitor Adjustment Procedure” (Service tools
installing SMPTE pattern) using the SMPTE pattern. See Chapter 1, section 2-7-2 Color Landscape
Monitor(s) Adjustment Procedure for details on monitor alignment.

• Adjust Brightness and Contrast levels so that the Grey scale is integrally displayed.

Appendix 1 - Unpacking (HP Z800 only)
1 Overview
This chapter explains the mandatory procedures for unpacking the HP Z800 workstation, and for returning
a defective unit, on site, by a single Field Engineer.
Caution: The HP Z800 workstation is heavy. It is above the 23 kg / 50 lbs safe weight lifting
limit fixed by EHS directions for employee safety. When packaged it weighs even
more. If only one person is available for these handling procedures, the following
recommendations must be followed in order to reduce the risk of strains or other
injury.
Follow safe lifting practices at all times while performing these tasks.
Note: The HP Z800 workstation has handles on top to assist lifting. The packaging carton also has lifting
holes on the sides.
Safety shoes, eye protection and cut resistant gloves must be worn during cutting operations and
while handling the unit.
Unpacking.fm Page no. 241

Caution: Do not attempt to lift the

workstation alonePlease
use an appropriate
device to assist handling
on site.
2 Unpacking procedure
1. Before attempting to unpack this HP workstation, or to move it from the delivery/storage areas to its
installation point, check whether any local technicians or support maintenance staff are available to
help you.
2. Use the FE handcart or a customer hand dolly, to move the unopened carton to the room where the
unit will be installed.
Page no. 242 Unpacking.fm

3. Remove the carton from the transport trolley then tilt flat on one of its sides.
4. Carefully open the bottom of the carton using an approved retractable cutting tool. Cut resistant
gloves must be worn during this process.
5. Remove the internal packaging containing the keyboard, mouse and other accessories.

6. Tilt the carton upright, keeping it open as shown below.
7. Remove the carton from above, taking care not to lift the workstation or knock it over.

8. Tilt the workstation as necessary, in order to remove the foam protectors and plastic packaging.
9. Remove the protective polythene sheet attached to the side plate.
10. If you need to move the workstation to a final destination, tilt the workstation in order to slide the
forward edge of the hand dolly beneath it.
Note: Wheel the workstation carefully to its final destination.The HP Z800 workstation has handles on top
to assist lifting (see photo in step 9).

Caution: Do not attempt to lift the workstation alone.
If the workstation must be installed on a table or other raised surface, seek assistance to lift it using its
handles. Alternatively, use a device similar to the Genie lift, which is designed to assist safe, controlled l
lifting. Secure the unit to the lift surface with a tie-down strap to prevent falling
.
3 Returning procedure
This section describes the procedure for repacking and returning a defective workstation, after
replacement by an equivalent FRU unit.
• Use Section 2 Unpacking procedure to unpack and handle the new workstation FRU.
• Reuse the packaging of the new FRU unit to ship the defective workstation back.
1. Before attempting to unpack the replacement workstation alone, or to repack the defective one,
check whether any local technicians or support maintenance staff are available to help you.
Caution: Do not attempt to lift the workstation alone. Please use an appropriate device to
assist handling on site.
2. Use the FE handcart or a customer hand dolly (see Section 2) to move the defective workstation to
the room where it will be packaged for shipping.
3. Tilt the workstation on one of its sides.

4. Use the supplied plastic bag to wrap the unit. Refit the foam protectors to the top and bottom of the
wrapped workstation.
5. To ease the operation, you can secure the foam protectors with tape before tilting the unit up.
6. Carefully tilt the unit upright.
7. Slide the empty carton over the workstation fitted with its foam protectors.

8. Carefully tip the carton onto one of its large sides and tape it shut.
9. Tip the carton upright.
Caution: Do not attempt to lift the

workstation alone
.
Caution: Please use an

appropriate device to
assist handling on site.
10. Slide or use the hand dolly to move the re-packaged workstation to where it will be stored until
shipping.

Appendix 2 - Glossary & Linux Commands
1 Glossary
This glossary contains a non-exhaustive list of LINUX terms commonly used.
ABSOLUTE PATHNAME
The list of directories starting with the root directory, specified as /, down through the file system tree
structure to the file or directory in question, with each directory along the way separated from the others
with an additional / character. The other types of pathnames are: simple and relative pathnames.
ACCOUNT
The means by which a user accesses the system and the system administrator assigns space for the
user’s files and directories. Usernames and passwords are specific to the accounts.
ALIAS
An alias is a user–specified abbreviation, or alternate string, for a standard command string.
APPEND
Attach to the end.
APPEND OUTPUT
Attach redirected output to the end of a file.
ARGUMENT
Any word (string of characters separated by spaces or tabs) occurring after the command in a command
line.
ARITHMETIC OPERATOR
Symbols used to indicate and execute addition (+), subtraction (– ), multiplication (*), and division.
ASTP
Advanced Service Tools Platform. The tools provided on AW’s Utilities menu for system configuration
and diagnostics.
BACKGROUND
The place where a command, or commands, are run while commands are still being typed in the
foreground, with background and foreground commands executing apparently simultaneously.
BUG
Any problem or error in the design or coding of a program.
CASE–SENSITIVE
Treating lower–case and upper–case characters as two kinds of characters with separate functions.
CHILD DIRECTORY
The directory directly below the current working directory in the file system tree structure.
COLON MODE
In vi, the mode where files are written or quit the program. Type ”:” when in command mode to access
colon mode. Besides command mode and colon mode, vi has insert mode.
COMMAND
A string of characters typed to the system, expecting it to respond by performing a certain function
unique to that command line. The command is sometimes called the “verb” of the command line
“sentence”.
COMMAND EDITING
Appendix_AW.fm Page no. 249

Modifying a previous command line for reuse as a new command.

COMMAND LINE
A string of characters beginning with a command followed by arguments, which aren’t necessarily
required, including options, filenames, and other expressions.
COMMAND MODE
In vi, the mode where moving and deleting commands are typed, as well as changing text commands
that access insert mode. vi starts out in command mode; the other modes are insert mode and colon
mode.
COMMAND PROMPT
The string of characters that the system types indicating it is ready to accept and interpret the next
command line. Often, the command prompt includes the name of the system.
COMMAND REPETITION
Repeating a previous command line, or portion of one, for reuse as a new command line.
COMMAND SUBSTITUTION
Substituting a portion of a previous command line for reuse as a new command line.
CONCATENATE
Literally, to link together in series. For LINUX, to type a file on the screen.
CONSOLE
When you log in at the actual machine, rather than accessing the machine from another machine, you
log in on the console.
CONTROL CHARACTERS
Keys that require that you press and hold down the <CTRL> key while typing the associated character to
perform a certain function. For example, <CTRL> <U> deletes the current command line before
execution. Control keys extend the functionality of the keyboard.
COORDINATED UNIVERSAL TIME
See Greenwich Mean Time.
CSD
Common Service Desktop - access to software tools for configuration, problem diagnosis and preventive
maintenance of the AW Workstation.
CURRENT DIRECTORY
See working directory.
CURSOR
The rectangular portion of the screen that moves as you type on the keyboard, indicating your current
position on the screen.
DEBUG
To attempt to fix problems with programs.
DIRECTORY
A “container” for files and other directories that resides within the LINUX file system in a tree structure.
Directories and their associated files can be created (make), moved, copied and removed. Really,
directories are a special type of file.
DOWNTIME
Time when the computer is not working because of maintenance or an unknown problem.
ECHO
The way that the system types back onto the screen the keys that you press.
Page no. 250 Appendix_AW.fm

EDITOR
See text editor.
EMPTY DIRECTORY
A directory that doesn’t contain any files or directories.
END–OF–FILE CHARACTER
<CTRL> <D> the character used to indicate when you have finished typing in a file.
ERROR MESSAGE
A character string that the system types to let you know that there is a problem with a command, or
perhaps with something else. Usually, the error message will give you some idea of how to correct the
problem.
ESCAPE KEYS
Keys that require that you press and release the <ESC> key before typing the associated character.
Escape keys are a way of extending the functionality of the keyboard.
EXPRESSION
An expression is a string of characters that signifies a certain meaning to the system.
FMI
Field Modification Instruction
FILE
A “container” for text or binary data. Files can be created, moved, copied, listed, and removed, or
deleted.
Text files are a good way to save memos, phone lists, programs, and other portions of text. Use a text
editor to create and modify text files.
FILENAMES
The name assigned to a file. Do not use special characters in the filename, because the system may
misinterpret the filename as something else.
FILENAME EXTENSION
A portion of a filename appended to the end, often demarcated with a period character.
FILE PROTECTION
The way that the system maintains some security over the contents of your files.
FILE SYSTEM
In the case of LINUX, a tree–structured network of files and directories, through which you can move to
access the files and directories contained in it.
FILE SYSTEM HIERARCHY
The structure of the file system, consisting of a tree of files and directories, with a root directory at the
“top” and directories acting as parent directories and child directories throughout.
FILLING
The process of placing a series of words on a line until the end of that line, and so on. The formatter fills
text unless you type a command, such as the line break command .br, indicating that it do otherwise.
FOREGROUND
The place where commands are typed at the command prompt for the system to execute. Type an
ampersand character at the end of a command line to have the system execute that command line in the
background, while continuing to type commands at the command prompt for execution in the foreground.
FORMATTER
See text formatter.

GREENWICH MEAN TIME

The time at the Greenwich meridian, from which all the time zones on the earth are established.
Sometimes known as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
HARDCOPY
A copy of a text file that is on a piece of paper, not stored somewhere on the computer.
HIDDEN FILES
Files that don’t show up in a simple listing, because they have a period character as the first character in
their filename.
HIERARCHY
See file system hierarchy.
HISTORY MECHANISM
The way that the system keeps track of commands that have been typed previously so that they can be
reused with command repetition and command editing.
HOME DIRECTORY
The directory you are in when you first log in to the system, which is also your personal root directory to
all the files and directories you create in your own area.
HOSTNAME
The name of a machine, or host.
INDENT
To put spaces or tabs before a section of text, particularly at the beginning of a paragraph.
INSERT MODE
For vi, insert mode is the mode in which text is inserted or changed; you exit by typing <ESC>. The other
vi modes are: command mode and colon mode.
INTERACTIVE PROGRAM
A program that requires commands to be typed after it has been started, rather than executing its
function in full after a single command line is entered.
INTERRUPT
To stop the execution of a command or program.
JOB CONTROL
The way that the system keeps track of all the commands run in the foreground and background, as well
as all the commands that other users may run on the system.
KEYBOARD
A part of the workstation, similar to a typewriter, that permits characters to be input and displayed on the
screen.
LEFT–JUSTIFY
To put characters up against the left margin, or side of the page.
LINE BREAK
A way to stop the flow of filling, so that a line of text ends at a specific point, with any further words
appearing on the next line.
LINE SPACE
A way to indicate a blank vertical spacing equivalent to one line, usually mentioned when formatting.

LOGIN
Gaining access to the system, usually by typing a username and password, so that a work session on
the computer can be begun.
LOGIN PROMPT
The string of characters that the system types to let you know that it is ready to interpret your username
when you decide to type it.
LOGOUT
Ending access to the system, usually when the work session is ended, prevents an unauthorized user
from having access to your account, perhaps causing damage to one of your files, or accessing sensitive
information.
MARKER
In this case, the – character is marker for options, so that when you type a command with an option, the
system can figure out that you have typed an option, not another kind of command argument.
MESSAGE OF THE DAY
A portion of text that the system may type at log in. The system administrator sometimes creates this
message to let users know about downtime or other important system events.
MODE
See command mode, colon mode, or insert mode.
MOUSE
A small, rectangular part of the workstation, with three buttons and a wire running out of it, that permits
better control of the window system, when it is running.
NATURAL LANGUAGE
The languages that people, as opposed to machines, speak, read, or write in societies and cultures of all
eras.
OPERATING SYSTEM
A collection of programs that monitors the use of the machine and supervises the other programs
executed by it. Currently, Redhat 7.3 is used for AW on Linux.
OPERATOR
See arithmetic operator.
OPTION
A portion of the command line sometimes compared with an adverb because it modifies the effect of the
command you type.
OUTPUT REDIRECTION
See redirecting output.
PACIFIC STANDARD TIME
The standard time on the West coast of the United States, established primarily by the distance from
Greenwich, England.
PARENT DIRECTORY
The directory above “this” directory in the file system tree structure.
PASSWORD
A character string that you type, usually just after your filename, to get access to the system. Keep your
password secret, and change it when you think someone discovers what it is.

PATHNAME
An identifier for the position of a file or directory within the tree structure of the file system. The three
types of pathnames are: simple, absolute, and relative.
PRINTER
A physical device that takes electrical signals, interprets them, and types them out onto paper.
PRINTOUT
A piece of paper, produced by a printer, that has the image of the characters from a file on it.
PROGRAM
A series of instructions that the system executes when you type the program name and commands
associated with the program. A programmer writes the set of instructions and figures out how to get the
system to use them properly.
READ AHEAD
See type ahead.
REDIRECTING OUTPUT
Causing what the system types as the result of a command to go into a file, rather than onto the screen.
Basic output redirection requires use of the > or >> symbols.
RELATIVE PATHNAME
A series of directory names separated by /’s that locates a file or directory with respect to the current, or
working directory. The other types of pathnames are: simple and absolute pathnames.
ROOT DIRECTORY
The “top” directory in the tree structure of the LINUX file system.
RUB OUT
To erase, or delete, from the screen.
SAVE A FILE
See write a file.
SCREEN
See terminal screen.
SEARCH A FILE
To look through the contents of a file, perhaps with grep, to find a certain character string.
SIMPLE PATHNAME
A file or directory name, without mention of any associated directories, that one uses to access the file or
directory.
SPECIAL CHARACTERS
One of a set of characters that have a meaning to the system, other than their meaning as a simple
character. For instance, the exclamation mark ! has a special meaning for the history mechanism, and
you shouldn’t use it in a filename.
STATUS LINE
For vi, the line the system types at the bottom of the interactive screen to provide information about the
number of characters or lines in a file, or whether an instruction to write the file was successful.
STRING
A series of characters.

SUB–DIRECTORY
The child directory of a parent directory, or any directory below that child directory.
SUSPEND
To halt, perhaps temporarily, the execution of a program.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
A person who manages the system, providing accounts, and hopefully solving any problems you have
with the computer.
TABLET
See mouse tablet
TERMINAL SCREEN
A flat, rectangular part of the workstation that you look at to see what you type to the system and what it
types back.
TEXT
Combinations of characters in strings, sometimes forming a comprehensible language of command
lines.
TEXT EDITOR
A program with which you can create files and modify them. For LINUX, the primary text editor is vi.
TREE STRUCTURE
The way that many people describe the LINUX file system hierarchy, drawing an analogy between the
structure of a tree and the structure of the file system. As with a tree, the file system originates with a
root, a root directory, which “grows” child directories on its branches.
TYPE AHEAD
The way that the system lets you type new commands while it is still interpreting and executing the
current command.
UNIVERSAL TIME
See Greenwich Mean Time.
LINUX OPERATING SYSTEM
The operating system that runs on LINUX workstations. See operating system for more information.
USERNAME
The character string with which you identify yourself to the system, usually assigned by your system
administrator.
WILD CARD CHARACTERS
Characters that have a special meaning to the system, because they specify all filename character
strings that have a certain attribute. For example, the wild card character asterisk, *, indicates a filename
string of arbitrary length.
WINDOW
A portion of the screen in which you can type commands or execute programs while running the window
system.
WINDOW SYSTEM
A set of programs that allows you to divide up the screen into portions where you can type various
commands and run many programs at the same time.

WORD
A character string, separated from other character strings by spaces or tab characters.
WORKING DIRECTORY
The current directory in which, among other activities, you can type commands and list files. When you
first log in, your working directory is your home directory.
WORK SESSION
The time that you access the computer to work or play, between when you log in and when you log out.
WORKSTATION
A system made up of a keyboard, a terminal screen, a mouse, and a mouse pad, which you can use for
profitable work or healthy recreation.
WRITE A FILE
For “vi”, to save the changes you have made to a file, so that when you next access the file, the changes
will still be there.

2 Linux commands
The following is a list of the commands available with this version of LINUX. The most basic
commands and those you will need to know to perform service work have been explained in
greater detail within this manual.
Important! Many of these commands can seriously alter the contents of files. Do not attempt to use these
commands unless you are sure of the results.
Command Description
arp address resolution protocol
at execute a command or script at a specified time
atq display the queue of jobs to be run at specified times
atrm remove jobs spooled by at or batch
awk pattern scanning and processing language
basename display portions of pathnames and filenames
bc arbitrary–precision arithmetic language
cat concatenate and display
chgrp change the group ownership of a file
chmod change the permissions mode of a file
chown change ownership of a file
chroot change root directory
cmp perform a byte–by–byte comparison of two files
colrm remove characters from specified columns within each line
comm display lines in common between two sorted lists
cp copy files
crontab install, edit, remove or list a user’s crontab file
csh a shell with a C–like syntax
cut remove selected fields from each line of a file
date display or set the date
dc desk calculator
dd convert and copy files with various data formats
df reports free disk space on file systems
diff display line–by–line differences between pairs of text files
dmesg collect system diagnostic messages to form error log
domainname set/display domain name
du display the number of disk blocks used per directory or file

Command Description
dump copy directories onto a tape for offline storage
echo echo arguments to the standard output
ed basic line editor
egrep search a file for a string or regular expression
ex line editor
expr evaluate arguments as an expression
false provide true values
file determine the type of a file by examining its contents
find find files by name, or by other characteristics
ftp file transfer protocol
getopt parse command options in shell scripts
grep pattern searches
groups displays a user’s group membership
hostid print the numeric identifier of the current host
hostname set or print the name of current host system
id print the user name and ID, and group name and ID
ifconfig configure network interface parameters
ifdown bring network card down, without rebooting the system
ifup bring network card up, without rebooting the system
inetd internet server daemon
init process control initialization
install install files
installboot install bootblocks in a disk partition
ipcrm remove message queue, semaphore, shared memory ID
ipcs report interprocess communication facilities status
kill send signal to process, or terminate a process
lastlog login records
ln make hard or symbolic links to files
login log in to the system
logout terminate a login shell
lpr send job to printer
ls list the contents of a directory
make maintain, update, and regenerate related programs & files
mkdir make a directory

Command Description
mkfs make file system
mknod creates a new file name by the path name pointed to by path
more browse or page through a text file
mount mount file systems
mt magnetic tape control
mv move or rename files
netstat display network status
networks network name database overview
nfsd starts the daemons that handle client filesystem requestchange
nice priority
passwd change password file information
ping checks to see if another machine is up and running
portmap DARPA port to rpc program number mapper
print env display environment variables currently set
ps display the status of current processes
pwd display the pathname of the current working directory
rcp remote file copy
reboot restart system
restore file system restore
rlogin remote login
rm remove (unlink) files or directories
rmt remote magnetic tape protocol server
route manipulate routing table
rpc library routines for remote procedure calls
rsh remote shell
sed stream editor
sh standard system shell
showmount show all remote mounts
shutdown close down the system
size display the size of an object file
sleep suspend execution for a specified interval
sort sort and collate lines
strip remove symbols and relocation bits from an object file
stty set or alter the options for a terminal

Command Description
su super–user, temporarily switch to a new user ID
sync update the super block; force changed blocks to the disk
tail display the last part of a file
tar create tape archives, and add or extract files
tee replicate the standard output
telnet interface to remote system using TELNET protocol
test return true or false according to a conditional expression
tftp trivial file transfer program
time time a command
touch update the access and modification times of a file
tr translate characters
true provide truth values
tset establish or restore terminal characteristics
tty display the name of the terminal
umount dismounts file systems
uniq remove or report adjacent duplicate lines
update periodically update the super block
uptime show how long the system has been up
vi visual display editor based on ex
w who is logged in, and what they are doing
wc display a count of lines, words and characters
which locate a command; display its pathname or alias
who who is logged in on the system
whoami display the current effective username
xedit Graphically based editor, that can be used in place of VI, in most cases
xfs_check & check and repair filesystem
xfs_repair
ypbind binds client processes to a yp server
ypcat print values in a YP database
ypmatch print the value of one or more keys from a YP map

Revision History
Revision History
Engineering Revision History

This document is released through MyWorkshop under reference DOC0800785. Refer to MyWorkshop for
document approval.
Revision Version Date Reason for Change

1 1 July 9th , 2010 Initial draft for HII review
1 2 October 19th, 2010 Initial release after HII
review (DOC0800905)
2 1 November 18th, 2010 See SPR INTge20071
3 1 August 24th, 2011 Update for provisional
AW4.6_04 introduction.
SPR HCSDM00093950.
4 1 January 9th, 2012 Update for AW4.6_04
introduction. SPR
HCSDM00113508.
Technical Publication Revision History

This document is available in TechPub under reference 5396255-100.
Revision Date Reason for change
A May 12, 2010 Initial draft release for review.
1 October 19th, N/A. Release not used.

2010
2 November 18th, Initial production release for AW VolumeShare 5 (AW4.6)

2010 introduction.
3 August 24th, Update for provisional AW4.6_04 introduction.

2011
4 January 5th, Update for AW4.6_04 introduction.

2012
rev.fm Page no. 261

Manufacturer address:
GE Medical Systems SCS

283, rue de la Minière
78533 Buc
France
www.gehealthcare.com
Imagination at work

AW46 - VS5 Service Manual - 5396255-100 - r4 - A4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AW46 - VS5 Service Manual - 5396255-100 - r4 - A4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

This page is blank.

Page no. 2 cover_AW.fm

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

Chapter 1: Basic Tools and Procedures

smTOC.fm Page no. 3

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

2-4 Advantage Workstation and Site Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Page no. 4 smTOC.fm

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

7-1 To read the Log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

smTOC.fm Page no. 5

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

2-1 Installation logfiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Page no. 6 smTOC.fm

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

7-6 Display Session Record Log Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

smTOC.fm Page no. 7

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

Chapter 3: Disassembly / Reassembly Procedures

Chapter 4: Renewal Parts

Chapter 6: Options - Hardware and Software

Page no. 8 smTOC.fm

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

5. Memory Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Chapter 8: Planned Maintenance

smTOC.fm Page no. 9

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

Page no. 10 smTOC.fm

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

smTOC.fm Page no. 11

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

Page no. 12 smTOC.fm

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Tова упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

language warning.fm Page no. 13

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles

Page no. 14 language warning.fm

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.

language warning.fm Page no. 15

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

BRÎDINÂJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

Page no. 16 language warning.fm

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на

language warning.fm Page no. 17

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

6 Omissions and Errors

Page no. 18 language warning.fm

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

Notes and Warnings

Notes and Warnings

definition-warning-notes.fm Page no. 19

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100

Notes and Warnings

This page is intentionally left blank.

Page no. 20 definition-warning-notes.fm

Revision 4 Service Manual 5396255-100